HP LaserJet Enterprise M4555 MFP user guide - ENWW

HP LaserJet Enterprise M4555 MFP user guide - ENWW

LASERJET ENTERPRISE M4555

MFP SERIES

User Guide

LaserJet Enterprise M4555 MFP Series

User Guide

Copyright and License

© 2011 Copyright Hewlett-Packard

Development Company, L.P.

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.

The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

Part number: CE502-90906

Edition 2, 4/2011

Trademark Credits

Intel® Core™ is a trademark of Intel

Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP, and Windows Vista® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

ENERGY STAR ® and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.

®

Conventions used in this guide

TIP:

Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.

NOTE:

Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

CAUTION:

Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product.

WARNING!

Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury, catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.

ENWW iii

iv Conventions used in this guide ENWW

Table of contents

1 Product basics .................................................................................................................. 1

Product comparison .................................................................................................................. 2

Environmental features .............................................................................................................. 4

Accessibility features ................................................................................................................ 5

Product views .......................................................................................................................... 6

Front view ................................................................................................................ 6

M4555 MFP .............................................................................................. 6

M4555f MFP ............................................................................................. 7

M4555fskm MFP ....................................................................................... 9

Back view .............................................................................................................. 10

Interface ports ......................................................................................................... 11

Serial number and model number location ................................................................. 11

Control-panel layout ................................................................................................ 12

Control-panel help system .......................................................................... 13

Touchscreen navigation ........................................................................................... 14

Buttons on the touchscreen ........................................................................ 16

2 Control panel menus ....................................................................................................... 17

Control panel menus .............................................................................................................. 18

Administration menu ............................................................................................................... 20

Reports menu .......................................................................................................... 20

General Settings menu ............................................................................................. 21

Copy Settings menu ................................................................................................. 24

Scan/Digital Send Settings menu .............................................................................. 27

Fax Settings menu ................................................................................................... 29

Open from USB Settings menu .................................................................................. 33

Print Settings menu .................................................................................................. 33

Print Options menu .................................................................................................. 34

Display Settings menu .............................................................................................. 35

Manage Supplies menu ........................................................................................... 37

Manage Trays menu ................................................................................................ 37

ENWW v

vi

Stapler/Stacker Settings menu .................................................................................. 38

Network Settings menu ............................................................................................ 39

Troubleshooting menu .............................................................................................. 42

Device Maintenance menu ...................................................................................................... 45

Backup/Restore menu .............................................................................................. 45

Calibration/Cleaning menu ...................................................................................... 45

USB Firmware Upgrade menu ................................................................................... 46

Service menu .......................................................................................................... 46

3 Software for Windows ................................................................................................... 47

Supported operating systems for Windows ................................................................................ 48

Supported printer drivers for Windows ..................................................................................... 49

Select the correct printer driver for Windows ............................................................................. 50

HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) ................................................................................. 51

UPD installation modes ............................................................................. 51

Priority for print settings .......................................................................................................... 52

Change printer-driver settings for Windows ............................................................................... 53

Change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed ....................... 53

Change the default settings for all print jobs ............................................................... 53

Change the product configuration settings .................................................................. 53

Remove software for Windows ................................................................................................ 55

Supported utilities for Windows ............................................................................................... 56

HP Web Jetadmin ................................................................................................... 56

HP Embedded Web Server ....................................................................................... 56

Software for other operating systems ........................................................................................ 57

4 Use the product with Mac ............................................................................................... 59

Software for Mac ................................................................................................................... 60

Supported operating systems for Mac ........................................................................ 60

Supported printer drivers for Mac ............................................................................. 60

Install software for Mac operating systems .................................................................. 60

Install software for Mac computers connected directly to the product .............. 60

Install software for Mac computers on a wired network ................................. 61

Configure the IP address ............................................................ 61

Install the software ..................................................................... 62

Remove software from Mac operating systems ............................................................ 63

Priority for print settings for Mac ............................................................................... 64

Change printer-driver settings for Mac ....................................................................... 64

Software for Mac computers ..................................................................................... 65

HP Utility for Mac ..................................................................................... 65

Open the HP Utility .................................................................... 65

ENWW

HP Utility features ...................................................................... 65

Supported utilities for Mac ....................................................................................... 66

HP Embedded Web Server ........................................................................ 66

Print with Mac ....................................................................................................................... 67

Cancel a print job with Mac ..................................................................................... 67

Change the paper size and type with Mac ................................................................. 67

Create and use printing presets with Mac .................................................................. 67

Resize documents or print on a custom paper size with Mac ........................................ 68

Print a cover page with Mac ..................................................................................... 68

Use watermarks with Mac ........................................................................................ 68

Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper with Mac ................................................... 69

Print on both sides (duplex) with Mac ........................................................................ 69

Store jobs with Mac ................................................................................................ 69

Solve problems with a Mac ..................................................................................................... 71

5 Connect the product ........................................................................................................ 73

Printer sharing disclaimer ........................................................................................................ 74

Connect with USB .................................................................................................................. 74

CD installation ........................................................................................................ 74

Connect to a network ............................................................................................................. 75

Supported network protocols .................................................................................... 75

Install the product on a wired network ....................................................................... 76

Configure the IP address ........................................................................... 76

Install the software .................................................................................... 78

Configure network settings ....................................................................................... 79

View or change network settings ................................................................ 79

Set or change the network password .......................................................... 79

Manually configure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel ................ 80

Manually configure IPv6 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel ................ 81

6 Paper and print media ................................................................................................... 83

Understand paper use ............................................................................................................ 84

Special paper guidelines .......................................................................................... 84

Change the printer driver to match the paper type and size in Windows ...................................... 85

Supported paper sizes ............................................................................................................ 86

Supported paper types ........................................................................................................... 89

Load paper trays .................................................................................................................... 90

Tray and bin capacity .............................................................................................. 90

Paper orientation for loading trays ............................................................................ 92

Paper orientation for loading Tray 1 ........................................................... 92

Paper orientation for loading Tray 2 or Trays 3, 4, and 5 ............................. 93

ENWW vii

viii

Load Tray 1 ............................................................................................................ 94

Load Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 with standard-size paper ........................... 95

Load Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 with custom-size paper .............................. 97

Configure trays ...................................................................................................................... 99

Configure a tray when loading paper ........................................................................ 99

Configure a tray to match print job settings ................................................................ 99

Configure a tray by using the control panel ................................................................ 99

Select the paper by source, type, or size .................................................................. 100

Source .................................................................................................. 100

Type and size ........................................................................................ 100

Select an output bin (for models with a stapler/stacker) ............................................................ 101

7 Manage supplies .......................................................................................................... 103

Print cartridge information ..................................................................................................... 104

Supplies views ..................................................................................................................... 105

Print cartridge views .............................................................................................. 105

Manage print cartridges ....................................................................................................... 106

Settings for print cartridges ..................................................................................... 106

Print when a print cartridge is at estimated end of life ................................. 106

Enable or disable the Very Low Settings options from the control panel ......... 106

Store and recycle supplies ...................................................................................... 107

Recycle supplies ..................................................................................... 107

Print-cartridge storage ............................................................................. 107

HP policy on non-HP print cartridges ......................................................... 107

HP anticounterfeit Web site .................................................................................... 107

Replacement instructions ....................................................................................................... 108

Replace the print cartridge ..................................................................................... 108

Replace the staple cartridge (for models with a stapler/stacker) .................................. 111

Solve problems with supplies ................................................................................................. 113

Check the print cartridge ........................................................................................ 113

Inspect the print cartridge for damage ...................................................... 113

Repeating defects ................................................................................... 114

Print the supplies status page ................................................................... 115

Interpret control panel messages for supplies ............................................................ 115

8 Print tasks .................................................................................................................... 119

Cancel a print job with Windows .......................................................................................... 120

Basic print tasks with Windows .............................................................................................. 121

Open the printer driver with Windows ..................................................................... 121

Get help for any printing option with Windows ........................................................ 122

Change the number of print copies with Windows .................................................... 122

ENWW

ENWW

Save custom print settings for reuse with Windows .................................................... 123

Use a printing shortcut with Windows ....................................................... 123

Create printing shortcuts ......................................................................... 124

Improve print quality with Windows ........................................................................ 127

Select the page size with Windows .......................................................... 127

Select a custom page size with Windows .................................................. 127

Select the paper type with Windows ........................................................ 127

Select the paper tray with Windows ......................................................... 127

Print on both sides (duplex) with Windows ............................................................... 128

Print on 10 x 15 cm (4 x 6 in) paper with Windows ................................................. 129

Print multiple pages per sheet with Windows ............................................................ 130

Select page orientation with Windows ..................................................................... 131

Additional print tasks with Windows ...................................................................................... 133

Print on preprinted letterhead or forms with Windows ................................................ 133

Print on special paper, labels, or transparencies ....................................................... 135

Print the first or last page on different paper with Windows ........................................ 138

Scale a document to fit page size with Windows ...................................................... 140

Add a watermark to a document with Windows ....................................................... 142

Create a booklet with Windows .............................................................................. 142

Select output options with Windows (fskm models only) ............................................. 144

Select an output bin with Windows .......................................................... 144

Select staple options with Windows .......................................................... 145

Use job storage features with Windows ................................................................... 147

Create a stored job with Windows ........................................................... 147

Print a stored job .................................................................................... 148

Delete a stored job with Windows ........................................................... 149

Set job storage options with Windows ...................................................... 149

Print one copy for proof before printing all the copies .................. 149

Temporarily store a private job on the product and print it later .... 150

Temporarily store a job on the product ....................................... 150

Permanently store a job on the product ...................................... 150

Make a permanently stored job private so that anyone who tries to print it must provide a PIN .................................................... 151

Receive notification when someone prints a stored job ................. 151

Set the user name for a stored job ............................................. 151

Specify a name for the stored job .............................................. 151

Print special jobs with Windows ............................................................................. 152

Set the duplex alignment ......................................................................... 152

Walk-up USB printing ........................................................................................................... 153

ix

x

9 Copy ............................................................................................................................ 155

Use copy functions ............................................................................................................... 156

Copy ................................................................................................................... 156

Cancel a copy job ................................................................................................ 157

Reduce or enlarge a copy image ............................................................................ 157

Collate a copy job ................................................................................................ 158

Copy settings ....................................................................................................................... 159

Change copy quality ............................................................................................. 159

Optimize the copy image for text or pictures ............................................. 159

Check the scanner glass for dirt or smudges .............................................. 159

Adjust the copy lightness/darkness ........................................................... 161

Define custom copy settings .................................................................................... 163

Set the paper size and type for copying on special paper .......................................... 163

Restore copy default settings ................................................................................... 164

Copy a book ....................................................................................................................... 165

Copy a photo ...................................................................................................................... 166

Create a stored copy job ...................................................................................................... 167

Copy mixed-size originals ..................................................................................................... 168

Copy on both sides (duplex) .................................................................................................. 169

Use Job Build mode .............................................................................................................. 171

10 Scan and send documents .......................................................................................... 173

Set up scan/send features ..................................................................................................... 174

Use scan/send functions ....................................................................................................... 176

Sign in ................................................................................................................. 176

Change default scan/send settings from the product control panel .............................. 176

Send a scanned document .................................................................................................... 177

Send a scanned document to a network folder .......................................................... 177

Send a scanned document to a folder in the product memory ..................................... 178

Send a scanned document to a USB flash drive ........................................................ 180

Send to e-mail ....................................................................................................... 181

Supported protocols ............................................................................... 181

Configure e-mail server settings ................................................................ 182

Send a scanned document to one or more e-mail addresses ........................ 183

Use the address book ............................................................................. 184

Add contacts to the address book from the product control panel . . 184

Send a document to e-mail by using the address book ................. 186

11 Fax ............................................................................................................................ 189

Set up fax ........................................................................................................................... 190

ENWW

ENWW

Introduction .......................................................................................................... 190

HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500 features ....................................................... 190

Verify fax operation .............................................................................................. 191

Required fax settings ............................................................................................. 191

Fax Setup Wizard .................................................................................. 192

Set or verify the date and time ................................................................. 193

Set or verify the date/time format ............................................................. 193

Set fax settings ..................................................................................................................... 194

Remote fax configuration ....................................................................................... 194

Web browser ........................................................................................ 194

HP Web Jetadmin .................................................................................. 194

HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration Utility ............................... 195

Send fax settings ................................................................................................... 195

Fax send setup ....................................................................................... 195

Fax Setup Wizard ................................................................... 195

Fax dialing settings .................................................................. 197

General fax send settings ......................................................... 201

Set billing codes ...................................................................... 203

Default job options ................................................................................. 204

Image preview ........................................................................ 205

Set the outgoing fax resolution .................................................. 205

Original sides ......................................................................... 206

Notification ............................................................................ 206

Content orientation .................................................................. 207

Original size .......................................................................... 207

Image adjustment .................................................................... 208

Optimize text/picture .............................................................. 208

Job build ................................................................................ 209

Blank page suppression ........................................................... 209

Receive fax settings ............................................................................................... 210

Fax receive setup ................................................................................... 210

Set the ringer volume ............................................................... 210

Set rings-to-answer .................................................................. 210

Set fax receive speed ............................................................... 211

Set ring interval ....................................................................... 211

Set ring frequency ................................................................... 212

Enable or disable the fax printing schedule ............................................... 212

Block incoming faxes .............................................................................. 213

Create a blocked-fax list ........................................................... 213

Delete numbers from the blocked-fax list ..................................... 213

Initiate polling receive .............................................................. 214

xi

xii

Default job options ................................................................................. 214

Notification ............................................................................ 214

Stamp received faxes (incoming faxes) ...................................... 215

Set fit-to-page .......................................................................... 215

Set the paper selection ............................................................. 216

Set the output bin .................................................................... 216

Set the sides ........................................................................... 217

Set the paper tray .................................................................................. 217

Enable fax forwarding ............................................................................ 218

Use fax ............................................................................................................................... 219

Fax feature screen ................................................................................................. 219

Status message bar ............................................................................................... 220

Send a fax ........................................................................................................... 220

Send a fax by entering numbers manually ................................................. 221

Send a fax using speed dial .................................................................... 222

Search a speed-dial list by name .............................................................. 222

Enable speed dial matching .................................................................... 223

Send a fax by using fax address book numbers ......................................... 224

Fax address book search ........................................................................ 224

Cancel a fax ........................................................................................................ 224

Cancel the current fax transmission ........................................................... 224

Cancel pending faxes ............................................................................. 225

Receive faxes ....................................................................................................... 225

Create or delete speed dial lists .............................................................................. 225

Create a speed dial list ........................................................................... 226

Delete a speed dial list ............................................................................ 227

Delete a single number from the speed dial list .......................................... 228

Add a number to an existing speed dial list ............................................... 229

Voice calls and retries ........................................................................................... 231

Fax call report ....................................................................................... 231

Fax activity log ...................................................................................... 231

T.30 report ............................................................................................ 231

Print stored faxes ................................................................................................... 231

Scheduling fax printing (memory lock) ..................................................................... 231

Use fax over VoIP networks .................................................................................... 232

Solve fax problems ............................................................................................................... 233

Is your fax set up correctly? .................................................................................... 233

What type of phone line are you using? .................................................... 233

Are you using a surge-protection device? .................................................. 233

Are you using a phone company voice-messaging service or an answering machine? .............................................................................................. 234

ENWW

Does your phone line have a call-waiting feature? ...................................... 234

Check fax accessory status ..................................................................................... 234

Fax feature is not operating .................................................................................... 235

General fax problems ............................................................................................ 235

Problems with receiving faxes ................................................................................. 236

Problems with sending faxes ................................................................................... 237

Error codes .......................................................................................................... 238

Fax error messages ............................................................................................... 238

Send-fax messages ................................................................................. 240

Receive-fax messages ............................................................................. 242

Fax reports ........................................................................................................... 243

Fax activity log ...................................................................................... 243

Billing code report .................................................................................. 244

Blocked fax list report ............................................................................. 244

Speed dial list report .............................................................................. 244

Fax call report ....................................................................................... 244

Clear the fax activity log ......................................................................... 244

Service settings ..................................................................................................... 245

Settings in the Troubleshooting menu ........................................................ 245

Settings in the Resets menu ...................................................................... 245

Firmware upgrades ............................................................................................... 245

12 Manage and maintain ................................................................................................ 247

Print information pages ......................................................................................................... 248

Use the HP Embedded Web Server ........................................................................................ 249

Open the HP Embedded Web Server by using a network connection .......................... 249

HP Embedded Web Server features ......................................................................... 250

Information tab ...................................................................................... 250

General tab ........................................................................................... 250

Copy/Print tab ....................................................................................... 251

Scan/Digital Send tab ............................................................................ 252

Fax tab (fskm models only) ...................................................................... 253

Troubleshooting tab ................................................................................ 253

Security tab ........................................................................................... 254

HP Web Services tab .............................................................................. 254

Networking tab ...................................................................................... 254

Other Links list ....................................................................................... 254

Use HP Web Jetadmin software ............................................................................................. 255

Product security features ........................................................................................................ 256

Security statements ................................................................................................ 256

IP Security ............................................................................................. 256

ENWW xiii

xiv

Secure the HP Embedded Web Server ..................................................................... 256

Encryption support: HP Encrypted High Performance Hard Disks ................................. 256

Secure stored jobs ................................................................................................. 257

Lock the control panel menus .................................................................................. 257

Lock the formatter .................................................................................................. 257

Economy settings ................................................................................................................. 258

Powersave modes ................................................................................................. 258

Set sleep mode ...................................................................................... 258

Set sleep delay ...................................................................................... 258

Set the sleep schedule ............................................................................. 259

Install external I/O devices .................................................................................................... 260

Clean the product ................................................................................................................ 262

Clean the paper path ............................................................................................ 263

Clean the scanner glass ......................................................................................... 263

Product updates ................................................................................................................... 265

13 Solve problems ........................................................................................................... 267

Self help ............................................................................................................................. 268

Solve problems checklist ....................................................................................................... 269

Factors that affect product performance ................................................................... 270

Restore factory settings ......................................................................................................... 271

Interpret control-panel messages ............................................................................................ 272

Control-panel message types .................................................................................. 272

Control-panel messages ......................................................................................... 272

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed ............................................................................ 273

The product does not pick up paper ........................................................................ 273

The product picks up multiple sheets of paper ........................................................... 273

Prevent paper jams ................................................................................................ 273

Clear jams ........................................................................................................... 274

Jam locations ......................................................................................... 274

Clear jams in the document feeder ........................................................... 276

Clear paper jams in the stapler (for models with a stapler/stacker) ............... 277

Clear staple jams (for models with a stapler/stacker) .................................. 278

Clear jams in the output bin area ............................................................. 281

Clear jams from under the top cover ......................................................... 281

Clear jams in the right door ..................................................................... 283

Clear jams in Tray 1 ............................................................................... 284

Clear jams in Trays 2, 3, 4, or 5 .............................................................. 288

Clear jams in the lower right door (Trays 3, 4, or 5) ................................... 289

Clear jams in the fuser ............................................................................ 290

Clear jams in the registration area ........................................................... 294

ENWW

Change jam recovery ............................................................................. 296

Improve print quality ............................................................................................................. 297

Select a paper type ............................................................................................... 297

Use paper that meets HP specifications .................................................................... 297

Print a cleaning page ............................................................................................ 298

Set the image registration ....................................................................................... 298

Check the print cartridge ........................................................................................ 298

Use the printer driver that best meets your printing needs ........................................... 300

Improve print quality for copies ............................................................................... 301

The product does not print or it prints slowly ............................................................................ 302

The product does not print ...................................................................................... 302

The product prints slowly ........................................................................................ 303

Solve walk-up USB printing problems ...................................................................................... 304

The Open from USB menu does not open when you insert the USB accessory ............... 304

The file does not print from the USB storage accessory ............................................... 304

The file that you want to print is not listed in the Open from USB menu ........................ 305

Solve connectivity problems ................................................................................................... 306

Solve direct-connect problems ................................................................................. 306

Solve network problems ......................................................................................... 306

Poor physical connection ......................................................................... 306

The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product ...................... 306

The computer is unable to communicate with the product ............................ 307

The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network .......... 307

New software programs might be causing compatibility problems ................ 307

The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly .............................. 307

The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect .................... 307

Solve product software problems with Windows ...................................................................... 308

Solve product software problems with Mac ............................................................................. 309

The printer driver is not listed in the Print & Fax list .................................................... 309

The product name does not appear in the product list in the Print & Fax list .................. 309

The printer driver does not automatically set up the selected product in the Print & Fax list ....................................................................................................................... 309

A print job was not sent to the product that you wanted ............................................. 310

When connected with a USB cable, the product does not appear in the Print & Fax list after the driver is selected. ...................................................................................... 310

You are using a generic printer driver when using a USB connection ........................... 310

Appendix A Supplies and accessories .............................................................................. 311

Order parts, accessories, and supplies ................................................................................... 312

Part numbers ....................................................................................................................... 313

Accessories .......................................................................................................... 313

ENWW xv

xvi

Customer self-repair parts ....................................................................................... 313

Cables and interfaces ............................................................................................ 314

Appendix B Service and support ...................................................................................... 315

Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement ............................................................................. 316

HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement .................. 317

Data stored on the print cartridge ........................................................................................... 318

End User License Agreement .................................................................................................. 319

OpenSSL ............................................................................................................................. 321

Customer self-repair warranty service ..................................................................................... 322

Customer support ................................................................................................................. 323

Appendix C Product specifications ................................................................................... 325

Physical specifications .......................................................................................................... 326

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions .......................................... 326

Environmental specifications .................................................................................................. 326

Appendix D Regulatory information ................................................................................ 327

FCC regulations ................................................................................................................... 328

Environmental product stewardship program ........................................................................... 329

Protecting the environment ...................................................................................... 329

Ozone production ................................................................................................. 329

Power consumption ............................................................................................... 329

Toner consumption ................................................................................................ 329

Paper use ............................................................................................................. 329

Plastics ................................................................................................................. 329

HP LaserJet print supplies ....................................................................................... 330

Return and recycling instructions ............................................................................. 330

United States and Puerto Rico .................................................................. 330

Multiple returns (more than one cartridge) .................................. 330

Single returns .......................................................................... 330

Shipping ................................................................................ 330

Non-U.S. returns .................................................................................... 331

Paper .................................................................................................................. 331

Material restrictions ............................................................................................... 331

Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ...... 332

Chemical substances ............................................................................................. 332

Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) ......................................................................... 332

For more information ............................................................................................. 332

Declaration of conformity ...................................................................................................... 334

ENWW

Declaration of conformity (fax models) .................................................................................... 336

Safety statements ................................................................................................................. 338

Laser safety .......................................................................................................... 338

Canadian DOC regulations .................................................................................... 338

VCCI statement (Japan) .......................................................................................... 338

Power cord instructions .......................................................................................... 338

Power cord statement (Japan) ................................................................................. 338

EMC statement (China) .......................................................................................... 339

EMC statement (Korea) .......................................................................................... 339

EMI statement (Taiwan) .......................................................................................... 339

Laser statement for Finland ..................................................................................... 339

GS statement (Germany) ........................................................................................ 340

Substances Table (China) ....................................................................................... 340

Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Turkey) ............................................. 340

Additional statements for telecom (fax) products ....................................................................... 341

EU Statement for Telecom Operation ....................................................................... 341

New Zealand Telecom Statements ........................................................................... 341

Additional FCC statement for telecom products (US) .................................................. 341

Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US) .................................................................. 342

Industry Canada CS-03 requirements ...................................................................... 342

Japan Telecom Mark ............................................................................................. 343

Vietnam Telecom wired marking for ICTQC Type approved products .......................... 343

Index ............................................................................................................................... 345

ENWW xvii

xviii ENWW

1 Product basics

Product comparison

Environmental features

Accessibility features

Product views

ENWW 1

Product comparison

M4555 MFP

CE502A

Prints up to 55 pages per minute (ppm) on

Letter-size or 52 ppm on A4-size paper

Automatic two-sided printing

500-sheet, face-down output bin

Scans up to 55 single-sided monochrome or color images per minute (ipm) for Letter-size pages, 26 ipm for two-sided monochrome jobs, and up to 19 ipm for two-sided color jobs

Hi-Speed USB 2.0 port

HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100/1000Base-T or

Gigabit IPsec IPv6 network

Digital sending features, including sending to e-mail, network folders, a USB flash drive, and color or mono scanning

100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1)

USB port on the control panel for walk-up printing and scanning (This port has a protective cover; Use the

HP Embedded Web Server Security tab to enable the port)

500-sheet input tray (Tray 2)

Color touchscreen display

50-sheet document feeder for copying and scanning

Flatbed scanner that holds pages up to legal size, auto senses letter and legal size pages, and can scan originals of mixed letter and legal sizes

Hinged control panel to adjust the viewing angle

800 megahertz (MHz) processor

Solid state hard drive (on the formatter PCA)

Total installed random access memory

(RAM): 1.25 GB

Hardware integration pocket on the control panel for adding third-party solutions

(includes a USB port)

This model has the same features as the M4555 MFP model, with the following differences:

HP Encrypted High Performance Hard Disk Drive (on the formatter PCA) instead of the solid state hard drive

M4555h MFP

CE738A

2 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW

M4555f MFP

CE503A

This model has the same features as the M4555 MFP model, with the following differences:

● HP 1 x 500 sheet feeder (Tray 3) with cabinet (increases the total input capacity to 1100 pages)

Analog faxing with the built-in HP Analog Fax Accessory 500

HP Encrypted High Performance Hard Disk Drive (on the formatter PCA)

This model has the same features as the M4555 MFP model, with the following differences:

HP 3 x 500 sheet feeder (Trays 3, 4, and 5) with stand (increases the total input capacity to

2100 pages)

HP Stapling Mailbox that holds up to 900 sheets (replaces the 500-sheet output bin)

Analog faxing with the built-in HP Analog Fax Accessory 500

HP Encrypted High Performance Hard Disk Drive (on the formatter PCA)

M4555fskm MFP

CE504A

ENWW

Product comparison

3

Environmental features

Duplex Save paper by using duplex printing as your default print setting.

Print multiple pages per sheet Save paper by printing two or more pages of a document side-by-side on one sheet of paper.

Access this feature through the printer driver.

Recycling Reduce waste by using recycled paper.

Recycle print cartridges by using the HP return process.

Energy savings

HP Smart Web printing

Job storage

Save energy by initiating sleep mode for the product.

Use HP Smart Web printing to select, store, and organize text and graphics from multiple

Web pages and then edit and print exactly what you see onscreen. It gives you the control you need for printing meaningful information while minimizing waste.

Download HP Smart Web printing from this Web site: www.hp.com/go/smartweb .

Use the job storage features to manage print jobs. By using job storage, you activate printing while you are at the shared product, eliminating lost print jobs that are then reprinted.

4 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW

Accessibility features

The product includes several features that aid you with accessibility issues.

Online user guide that is compatible with text screen-readers.

The print cartridge can be installed and removed by using one hand.

All doors and covers can be opened by using one hand.

Paper can be loaded in Tray 1 by using one hand.

ENWW

Accessibility features

5

Product views

Front view

M4555 MFP

1 2 3

4

5

6

7

8

6

7

4

5

8

9

1

2

3

9

Standard output bin

Control panel with color touchscreen display

Document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)

Document feeder input tray

Document feeder output bin

Top cover release lever

Tray 1

Right door latch

Tray 2

6 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW

M4555f MFP

1 2 3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

ENWW

6

7

4

5

8

9

1

2

3

Standard output bin

Control panel with color touchscreen display

Document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)

Document feeder input tray

Document feeder output bin

Top cover release lever

Tray 1

Right door latch

Tray 2

Product views

7

10

11

12

Tray 3

Lower right door latch

Storage cabinet

8 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW

M4555fskm MFP

2

1

3

4

5

15

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

ENWW

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

8

Stapler/stacker output bins

Stapler/stacker accessory

Control panel with color touchscreen display

Document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)

Document feeder input tray

Document feeder output bin

Top cover release lever

Tray 1

Product views

9

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Back view

Right door latch

Tray 2

Tray 3

Lower right door latch

Tray 4

Tray 5

Stapler door (access to the staple cartridge)

2

1

3

1

2

3

Interface ports (formatter)

Power connection

Power switch

10 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW

Interface ports

1

4

2

3

5

6

7

5

6

7

3

4

1

2

Slot for a cable-type security lock

Foreign interface ports for connecting third-party devices (round)

Hi-speed USB 2.0 printing port

Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port

USB port for connecting external USB devices

EIO interface expansion slot

Fax port (RJ-11)

Serial number and model number location

The model number and serial number are listed on an identification label located inside the product.

The serial number contains information about the country/region of origin, the product version, production code, and the production number of the product.

Model name

M4555 MFP

M4555h MFP

M4555f MFP

M4555fskm MFP

Model number

CE502A

CE738A

CE503A

CE504A

ENWW

Product views

11

Control-panel layout

1 2 3 4 5

6

7

3

4

1

2

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

14

Hardware integration port

Touchscreen graphical display

Brightness-adjustment button

Numeric keypad

Sleep button

Reset button

Stop button

Start button

Pause button

Attention light

Data light

Ready light

Backspace button

USB port (on the bottom edge of the hinged control panel)

9

8

13 12 11 10

Area for adding third-party security devices

Use the touchscreen to open and set up all product functions.

Use this button to increase or decrease the brightness of the touchscreen display.

Use this area to specify the number of copies and other numeric values.

If the product is inactive for a long period of time, it automatically enters a sleep mode. To place the product into sleep mode or to reactivate the product, press the

Sleep button.

Resets the job settings to factory or user-defined default values.

Stops the active job and opens the Job Status screen.

Begins a copy job, starts digital sending, starts a fax job, or continues a job that has been interrupted.

Use this button to indicate a required pause for a fax number.

Indicates that the product has a condition that requires intervention. Examples include an empty paper tray or an error message.

Indicates that the product is receiving data.

Indicates that the product is ready to begin processing any job.

Clears the active text or number field, and returns values to the default settings.

Connect a USB flash drive for walk-up printing and scanning (use the HP Embedded Web Server Security tab to enable the port).

12 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW

Control-panel help system

The product has a built-in Help system that explains how to use each screen. To open the Help system, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the screen.

For some screens, the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specific topics. You can browse through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu.

For screens that contain settings for individual jobs, the Help opens to a topic that explains the options for that screen.

If the product alerts you of an error or warning, touch the error or warning button to open a message that describes the problem. The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem.

ENWW

Product views

13

Touchscreen navigation

The home screen provides access to the product features, and it indicates the current status of the product.

NOTE:

HP regularly updates features that are available in the product firmware. To take advantage of the most current features, update the product firmware. To download the most recent firmware upgrade, go to www.hp.com/go/ljm4555mfp_firmware .

NOTE:

Depending on how the product has been configured, the features that appear on the home screen can vary.

2 3 4

HP LaserJet

5

1

DDMMYYYY 00.00 AM

1

8

Features

2

3

Product status

Copy count

7 6

Depending on how the product is configured, the features that appear in this area can include any of the following items:

Copy

Fax

E-mail

Save to Network Folder

Save to USB

Save to Device Memory

Open from USB

Open from Device Memory

Quick Sets

Job Status

Supplies

Trays

Administration

Device Maintenance

The status line provides information about the overall product status.

The copy count box indicates the number of copies that the product is set to make.

14 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW

4

5

6

Help button

Scroll bar

Sign In or Sign Out

7

8

Network Address

Date and time

Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.

Touch the up or down arrows on the scroll bar to see the complete list of available features.

Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.

Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the product if you have signed in for access to secured features. After you sign out, the product restores all options to the default settings.

Touch the Network Address button to find information about the network connection.

NOTE:

Depending on the product configuration, this button might not appear.

The current date and time appear here. You can select the format that the product uses to show the date and time, for example 12-hour format or 24-hour format.

ENWW

Product views

15

Buttons on the touchscreen

The status line on the touchscreen provides information about the product status. Various buttons can appear in this area. The following table describes each button.

Home button. Touch the home button to go to the Home screen from any other screen.

Start button. Touch the Start button to begin the action for the feature that you are using.

NOTE:

The name of this button changes for each feature. For example, in the Copy feature, the button is named Start Copy .

Error button. The error button appears whenever the product has an error that requires attention before it can continue. Touch the error button to see a message that describes the error. The message also has instructions for solving the problem.

Warning button. The warning button appears when the product has a problem but can continue functioning. Touch the warning button to see a message that describes the problem. The message also has instructions for solving the problem.

Help button. Touch the help button to open the built-in online Help system.

16 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW

2 Control panel menus

Control panel menus

Administration menu

Device Maintenance menu

ENWW 17

Control panel menus

The product has many menus on the control panel Home screen to help you perform tasks and configure settings.

NOTE:

To learn about each menu option, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the screen for that option.

NOTE:

HP regularly updates features that are available in the product firmware. To take advantage of the most current features, update the product firmware. To download the most recent firmware upgrade, go to www.hp.com/go/ljm4555mfp_firmware .

Table 2-1 Menus on the Home screen

Menu Description

Initial Setup

Copy

Fax

E-mail

Save to USB

Save to Network Folder

Open from USB

This menu appears when you first turn the product on. Use it to set the language, to set the date and time, to configure essential fax and e-mail settings, and to enable the Open from

USB feature.

After you have completed the initial setup, you have the option to hide this menu.

Use this menu to make copies of documents.

Several options are available for customizing jobs. These settings are temporary. After you have finished the job, the product returns to the default settings.

Use this menu to send a fax from the product. This menu is available only for products that have a fax accessory. For this menu to appear on the control panel, this feature must be set up by using the Initial Setup menu or by using the HP Embedded Web Server.

Several options are available for customizing jobs. These settings are temporary. After you have finished the job, the product returns to the default settings.

Use this menu to scan documents and send them as an e-mail attachment. For this menu to appear on the control panel, this feature must be set up by using the Initial Setup menu, by using the HP Scan to Email Setup Wizard during software installation, or by using the

HP Embedded Web Server.

Several options are available for customizing jobs. These settings are temporary. After you have finished the job, the product returns to the default settings.

Use this menu to scan documents and save them on a USB flash drive. For this menu to appear on the control panel, this feature must be set up by using the HP Embedded Web Server.

Several options are available for customizing jobs. These settings are temporary. After you have finished the job, the product returns to the default settings.

Use this menu to scan documents and save them to a shared folder on the network. For this menu to appear on the control panel, this feature must be set up by using the HP Embedded

Web Server or by using the HP Save to Folder Setup Wizard during software installation.

Several options are available for customizing jobs. These settings are temporary. After you have finished the job, the product returns to the default settings.

Use this menu to open and print a document stored on a USB flash drive. For this menu to appear on the control panel, this feature must be set up by using the Initial Setup menu.

18 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

Table 2-1 Menus on the Home screen (continued)

Menu Description

Save to Device Memory

Open from Device Memory

Quick Sets

Job Status

Trays

Supplies

Administration

Device Maintenance

Use this menu to scan documents and save them to the hard disk in the product.

Several options are available for customizing jobs. These settings are temporary. After you have finished the job, the product returns to the default settings.

Use this menu to open and print a document stored on the product hard drive.

Use this menu to access preset job options for jobs that you scan and send by fax or e-mail, or jobs that you scan and save to a USB flash drive, the product hard disk, or to a folder on the network.

Set up Quick Sets by using the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin.

Use this menu to see the status of all active jobs.

Use this menu to see the current status of each tray. You can also use this menu to configure the paper size and type settings for each tray.

Use this menu to see the current status of product supplies, such as the print cartridge.

Information about ordering new supplies is also available.

Use this menu to print reports and configure default settings for the product. The Administration menu has several sub-menus. See the sections that follow for details about these menus.

Use this menu to calibrate and clean the product and to backup and restore data. See the sections that follow for details about these menus.

ENWW

Control panel menus

19

Administration menu

You can perform basic product setup by using the Administration menu. Use the HP Embedded Web

Server for more advanced product setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the product IP address or host name in the address bar of a Web browser.

Reports menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Reports menu.

Table 2-2 Reports menu

First level

Configuration/Status Pages

Second level

Administration Menu Map

Fax Reports

Current Settings Page

Configuration Page

Supplies Status Page

Usage Page

File Directory Page

Fax Activity Log

Billing Codes Report

Blocked Fax List

Speed Dial List

Fax Call Report

Values

View

Print

View

Print

View

Print

View

View

Print

View

Print

Print

View

Print

View

Print

View

Print

View

Print

View

Print

20 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

Table 2-2 Reports menu (continued)

First level Second level

Other Pages PCL Font List

PS Font List

Values

Print

Print

General Settings menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the General

Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 2-3 General Settings menu

First level Second level

Date/Time Settings Date/Time Format

Third level

Date Format

Date/Time

Time Format

Date

Time

Time Zone

Fourth level Values

DD/MMM/YYYY

MMM/DD/YYYY

YYYY/MMM/DD

12 hour (AM/PM)

24 hours

Select the date from a pop-up calendar.

Select the time from a pop-up keypad.

Select the time zone from a list.

Checkbox

Energy Settings Sleep Schedule

Adjust for Daylight

Savings

A list of scheduled events displays.

Edit Delete

Event Type

Event Time

Event Days

Wake Up

Sleep

Select days of the week from a list.

ENWW

Administration menu

21

Table 2-3 General Settings menu (continued)

First level

Print Quality

Second level

Sleep Delay

Third level

Image Registration

Adjust Paper Types

Adjust Tray <X> Print Test Page

X1 Shift

Y1 Shift

X2 Shift

Select from a list of paper types that the product supports. The available options are the same for each paper type.

Y2 Shift

Print Mode

Resistance Mode

Optimize

Resolution

REt

Economode

Line Detail

Restore Optimize

Fourth level

Humidity Mode

Values

Enter a value between 1 and 120 minutes.

The default value is 45 minutes.

Range: -5.00 mm to

5.00 mm

Select from a list of print modes.

Normal

Up

Down

Normal

High

Normal *

Off

Alternate 1

Alternate 2

Alternate 3

300x300 dpi

600x600 dpi

FastRes 1200 *

ProRes 1200

Off

On *

Off *

On

22 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

Table 2-3 General Settings menu (continued)

First level

Quiet Mode

Jam Recovery

Manage Stored Jobs

Second level

Toner Density

Quick Copy Job Storage

Limit

Quick Copy Job Held

Timeout

Third level Fourth level

On

1-300

Default = 32

Off *

1 Hour

4 Hours

1 Day

1 Week

Values

Range of 1 to 5.

The default value is 3.

Off *

On

Automatic Transition

Auto *

Off

Default Folder Name for

Stored Jobs

Sort Stored Jobs By

Hold Off Print Job

Restore Factory Settings

Job Name *

Date

Enabled *

Disabled

All

Address Book

Digital Send

Copy

General

E-mail

Fax

Print

Security

Networking

ENWW

Administration menu

23

Copy Settings menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Copy

Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 2-4 Copy Settings menu

First level

Copies

Second level

Image Preview

NOTE:

You might need to upgrade the firmware to view this menu.

Sides

Staple/Collate

NOTE:

For models that include a stapler/ stacker

Collate

NOTE:

For models that do not include a stapler/stacker

Orientation

2-Sided Format

Staple

Collate

Values

Range: 1 – 9999

Default = 1

Make optional *

Require preview

Disable preview

1-sided original, 1-sided output *

1-sided original, 2-sided output

2-sided original, 1-sided output

2-sided original, 2-sided output

Portrait *

Landscape

Book-style

Flip-style

Book-style original; Flip-style copy

Flip-style original; Book-style copy

None

Top left

Top right

Off

On *

Collate on (Sets in page order) *

Collate off (Pages grouped)

24 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

Table 2-4 Copy Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level

Reduce/Enlarge Scaling

Paper Selection

Image Adjustment

Content Orientation

Output Bin

Optimize Text/Picture

Pages per Sheet

ENWW

Auto Include Margins

Darkness

Contrast

Background Cleanup

Sharpness

Orientation

2-Sided Format

Optimize For *

Values

Automatic

Range X-Y (25-400%)

100%

75%

50%

125%

150%

200%

Manually Feed

Automatically detect

Tray 1: [Size], [Type]

Tray <X>: [Size], [Type]

Portrait *

Landscape

Book-style

Flip-style

Book-style original; Flip-style copy

Flip-style original; Book-style copy

Select from a list of output bins.

Manually adjust *

Text

Printed picture

Photograph

One (1)

Two (2)

Four (4)

Administration menu

25

Table 2-4 Copy Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level

Page Order

Original Size

Edge-To-Edge

Job Build

Add Page Borders

Automatically detect *

Values

Right, then down

Down, then right

Select from a list of sizes that the product supports.

Normal (recommended) *

Edge-To-Edge output

Job Build off *

Job Build on

26 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

Scan/Digital Send Settings menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Scan/

Digital Send Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 2-5 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu

First level Second level Third level

E-mail Setup Wizard E-mail Settings

Default Save to Network

Folder Options

Default Save to USB

Options

NOTE:

The same options are available for each of these features, except where noted.

E-mail Setup

NOTE:

E-mail Settings only

Default Job Options Image Preview

NOTE:

You might need to upgrade the firmware to view this menu.

Default File Name

Document File Type

Optimize Text/Picture

Output Quality

Original Sides

Fourth level

Optimize For :

Orientation

2-Sided Format

Values

Make optional *

Require preview

Disable preview

Select from a list of file types.

Manually adjust *

Text

Printed picture

Photograph

High (large file)

Medium *

Low (small file)

1-sided

2-sided

Portrait *

Landscape

Book-style

Flip-style

ENWW

Administration menu

27

Table 2-5 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level

Resolution

Content Orientation

Color/Black

Original Size

Notification

Image Adjustment

Job Build

Blank Page Suppression

Fourth level

Orientation

2-Sided Format

Darkness

Contrast

Background Cleanup

Sharpness

Values

E-mail

Job Build off *

Job Build on

Enabled

Disabled *

600 dpi

400 dpi

300 dpi

200 dpi

150 dpi *

75 dpi

Portrait *

Landscape

Book-style *

Flip-style

Automatically detect

Color

Black/Gray

Black

Choose from a list of paper sizes.

Do not notify *

Notify when job completes

Notify only if job fails

Print

28 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

Table 2-5 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level

Digital Send Service

Setup

Allow Usage of Digital

Sending Software (DSS)

Server

Allow Transfer to New

Digital Sending Software

(DSS) Server

Fourth level Values

box. The default setting is with the check box cleared.

or box. The default setting is with the check box cleared.

Fax Settings menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Fax

Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 2-6 Fax Settings menu

First level Second level

Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup

Third level

Fax Setup Wizard

Fax Dialing Settings

Fourth level

Fax Dial Volume

Dialing Mode

Redial On Busy

Redial On No Answer

Redial Interval

Detect Dial Tone

Fax Send Speed

Dialing Prefix

Values

Off

Low *

High

Tone *

Pulse

Range: 0 – 9

Default = 3

Range: 0 - 2

Default = 0

1-5 Minutes

Default = 5 minutes

Fast

Medium

Slow

ENWW

Administration menu

29

30

Table 2-6 Fax Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level

Default Job Options

Third level

General Fax Send

Settings

Billing Codes

Image Preview

NOTE:

You might need to upgrade the firmware to view this menu.

Resolution

Original Sides

Fourth level Values

PC Fax Send

Fax Header

Enabled *

Disabled

Prepend *

Error Correction Mode

Overlay

Enabled *

Disabled

Fax Number Confirmation Enabled

JBIG Compression

Enable Billing Codes

Minimum Length

Default Billing Code

Allow users to edit billing codes

Disabled *

Enabled *

Disabled

Off *

On

Range: 1 – 16

Default = 1

Make optional *

Require preview

Disable preview

Orientation

2-Sided Format

Standard (100 x

200dpi) *

Fine (200 x 200dpi)

Superfine (300 x 300dpi)

1-sided *

2-sided

Portrait *

Landscape

Book-style *

Flip-style

Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

Table 2-6 Fax Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level

Fax Receive Settings Fax Receive Setup

Third level

Notification

Content Orientation

Job Build

Blank Page Suppression

Rings To Answer

Ring Frequency

Ring Interval

Ringer Volume

Fourth level

Notification E-mail address

Include Thumbnail

Orientation

2-Sided Format

Original Size

Image Adjustment

Optimize Text/Picture

Darkness

Contrast

Background Cleanup

Sharpness

Optimize For :

Values

Do not notify *

Notify when job completes

Notify only if job fails

Print

E-mail

Off

Low *

High

Text

Printed picture

Photograph

Job Build off *

Job Build on

Disabled *

Enabled

Portrait *

Landscape

Book-style *

Flip-style

Select from a list of sizes that the product supports.

Manually adjust *

ENWW

Administration menu

31

Table 2-6 Fax Settings menu (continued)

First level

Fax Archive and

Forwarding

Second level

Fax Printing Schedule

Enable Fax Archiving

Third level

Fax Receive Speed

Incoming Fax Options

Stamp Received Faxes

Fit to Page

Paper Selection

Output Bin

Sides

Type of Fax Job to

Archive

Fourth level

Blocked Fax Numbers

Default Job Options

Schedule

Touch this to set up a fax printing schedule if you selected the Use Fax

Printing Schedule option.

Add (plus sign)

Edit

Fax Number to Block

Notification

Values

Fast

Medium

Slow

Always store faxes

Always print faxes *

Use Fax Printing Schedule

Print incoming faxes

Store incoming faxes

Event Time

Event Days

Do not notify

Notify when job completes

Notify only if job fails

Include Thumbnail

Enabled

Disabled *

Enabled *

Disabled

Automatic

Select from a list of the trays.

Select from a list of the bins.

1-sided

2-sided

Send and receive *

Send only

Receive only

32 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

Table 2-6 Fax Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level

Enable Fax Forwarding

Third level

Fax Archiving E-mail

Address

Type of Fax Job to

Forward

Fourth level

Clear fax activity log

Values

Send and receive

Send only

Receive only

Fax Forwarding Number

Open from USB Settings menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Open from USB Settings menu.

This menu has only one setting. Use this menu to enable or disable the product's ability to print files from memory devices that are connected to the control panel USB port.

Print Settings menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Print

Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 2-7 Print Settings menu

First level

Manual Feed

Second level

Courier Font

Wide A4

Print PS Errors

Print PDF Errors

Values

Enabled

Disabled *

Regular *

Dark

Enabled

Disabled *

Enabled

Disabled *

Enabled

Disabled *

ENWW

Administration menu

33

PCL

Table 2-7 Print Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level

Personality

Form Length

Orientation

Font Source

Font Number

Font Pitch

Font Point Size

Symbol Set

Append CR to LF

Suppress Blank Pages

Media Source Mapping

Values

Auto *

PCL

POSTSCRIPT

PDF

Range: 5 – 128

Default = 60

Portrait *

Landscape

Internal *

Card slot 1

Card slot <X>

EIO <X> disk

USB

Range: 0 – 999

Default = 0

Range: 0.44 – 99.99

Default = 10

Range: 4.00 – 999.75

Default = 12.00

Select from a list of symbol sets.

No *

Yes

No *

Yes

Standard *

Classic

Print Options menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Print

Options menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

34 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

Table 2-8 Print Options menu

First level

Number of Copies

Default Paper Size

Default Custom Paper Size

Output Bin

Sides

Second level

X Dimension

Y Dimension

Use Inches

Use Millimeters

2-Sided Format

Enable Edge-To-Edge Override

Values

Select from a list of sizes that the product supports.

Select from a list of output bins.

1-sided *

2-sided

Book-style *

Flip-style

Enabled

Disabled *

Display Settings menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Display

Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 2-9 Display Settings menu

First level

Key Press Sound

Second level

Language Settings

Network Address Button

Language

Keyboard Layout

Values

On *

Off

Select from a list of languages that the product supports.

Each language has a default keyboard layout. To change it, select from a list of layouts.

Display

Hide

ENWW

Administration menu

35

Table 2-9 Display Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level

Sleep Mode

Inactivity Timeout

Clearable Warnings

Continuable Events

Values

Disabled

Use sleep delay *

Use sleep schedule

Balance power savings/Wait time

Range: 10 – 300 seconds

Default = 60 seconds

On

Job *

Auto continue (10 seconds) *

Press OK to continue

36 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

Manage Supplies menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage

Supplies menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 2-10 Manage Supplies menu

First level Second level

Supplies Status

Third level

Supply Settings

Supply Messages

Reset Supplies

Black Cartridge

Maintenance Kit

Document Feeder Kit

Low Message

New Document Feeder Kit

New Maintenance Kit

Very Low Settings

Low Threshold Settings

Very Low Settings

Low Threshold Settings

Very Low Settings

Low Threshold Settings

Fourth level Values

Print

View

Stop

Prompt to continue

Continue *

1-100%

Default = 10%

Stop

Prompt to continue

Continue *

1-100%

Default = 10%

Stop

Prompt to continue *

Continue

1-100%

Default = 10%

On *

Off

No

Yes

No

Yes

Manage Trays menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage

Trays menu.

ENWW

Administration menu

37

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 2-11 Manage Trays menu

First level

Use Requested Tray

Manually Feed Prompt

Size/Type Prompt

Use Another Tray

Alternative Letterhead Mode

Duplex Blank Pages

Override A4/Letter

Values

Exclusively *

First

Always *

Unless loaded

Display *

Do not display

Enabled *

Disabled

Disabled *

Enabled

Auto *

Yes

Yes *

No

Stapler/Stacker Settings menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Stapler/

Stacker Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 2-12 Stapler/Stacker Settings menu

First level

Operation Mode

Values

Mailbox

Stacker

Function Separator

38 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

Table 2-12 Stapler/Stacker Settings menu (continued)

First level Values

Stapling None

Top left or right

Top left

Top right

Staples Very Low Continue

Stop

Network Settings menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Network

Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 2-13 Network Settings menu

First level

I/O Timeout

Embedded Jetdirect Menu

EIO <X> Jetdirect Menu

Values

Range: 5 – 300 sec

Default = 15

See the table that follows for details. These menus have the same structure. If an additional HP Jetdirect network card is installed in the

EIO slot, then both menus are available.

Table 2-14 Embedded Jetdirect Menu / EIO <X> Jetdirect Menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level

Information Print Sec Page

TCP/IP Enable

Host Name

IPV4 Settings Config Method

Values

Yes

No *

On *

Off

Bootp

DHCP *

Auto IP

Manual

ENWW

Administration menu

39

40

Security

Table 2-14 Embedded Jetdirect Menu / EIO <X> Jetdirect Menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level

IP Address Manual Settings

NOTE:

This menu is available only if you select the Manual option under the Config Method menu.

Default IP

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

IPV6 Settings

DHCP Release

DHCP Renew

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

Enable

Address

DHCPV6 Policy

Manual Settings

Values

Enter the address.

Idle Timeout

Secure Web

IPSEC

802.1X

Chapter 2 Control panel menus

Primary DNS

Secondary DNS

Enter the address.

Enter the address.

Auto IP *

Legacy

No *

Yes

No *

Yes

Off

On *

Enable

Address

Router Specified

Router Unavailable *

Always

Default = 270

HTTPS Required *

HTTPS Optional

Keep

Disable *

Reset

Keep *

ENWW

Table 2-14 Embedded Jetdirect Menu / EIO <X> Jetdirect Menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level

Reset Security

Diagnostics

Ping Results

Embedded Tests

Execute

Dest Type

Dest IPv4

Dest IPv6

Packet Size

Timeout

Count

Print Results

Execute

LAN HW Test

HTTP Test

SNMP Test

Data Path Test

Select All Tests

Execution Time [M]

Default = 64

Default = 1

Default = 4

No *

Yes

No *

Yes

Values

Yes

No *

Yes

No *

Yes

No *

Yes

No *

Yes

No *

Yes

Yes

IPv4 *

IPv6

No *

Range: 1 – 60 hours

Default = 1 hour

No *

ENWW

Administration menu

41

Table 2-14 Embedded Jetdirect Menu / EIO <X> Jetdirect Menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level

Ping Results Packets Sent

Packets Received

Link Speed

Percent Lost

RTT Min

RTT Max

RTT Average

Ping in Progress

Refresh

Values

Default = 0

Default = 0

Range: 0-100 percent

Default = 0

Default = 0

Default = 0

Default = 0

No *

Yes

No *

Yes

Auto *

10T Half

10T Full

100TX Half

100TX Full

Troubleshooting menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the

Troubleshooting menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 2-15 Troubleshooting menu

First level Second level

Event Log

Third level Fourth level Values

View *

Print

42 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

Table 2-15 Troubleshooting menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level

Paper Path Page

Fax Fax T.30 Trace Print T.30 Report

Print Quality Pages

Diagnostic Tests

Fax V.34

Fax Speaker Mode

Fuser Test Page

Paper Path Sensors

Paper Path Test Test Page

Source

Destination

Duplex

Copies

Fourth level

When to Print Report

Values

View *

Print

Print

Never automatically print *

Print after every fax

Print only after fax send jobs

Print after any fax error

Print only after fax send errors

Print only after fax receive errors

10

50

100

500

Save

Normal *

Off

Normal *

Diagnostic

Print

Select from a list of the product sensors.

Print

Select from a list of the available trays.

Select from a list of the available bins.

Off *

On

1 *

ENWW

Administration menu

43

Table 2-15 Troubleshooting menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level

Stacking

Manual Sensor Test

Tray/Bin Manual Sensor

Test

Component Test

Print/Stop Test

Scanner Tests

Control Panel

Retrieve Diagnostic Data

Generate Debug Data

Fourth level Values

Off

On

Select from a list of available components.

Select from a list of available components.

Select from a list of available components.

Select from a list of available components.

LEDs

Display

Buttons

Touchscreen

Create device data file

Create zipped debug information file

Include crash dump files

Clean up debug information

Send to E-mail

Export to USB

44 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

Device Maintenance menu

Backup/Restore menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the

Backup/Restore menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 2-16 Backup/Restore menu

First level Second level

Backup Data

Restore Data

Enable Scheduled Backups

Backup Now

Export Last Backup

Third level

Backup Time

Days Between Backups

Values

Enter a time

Enter the number of days

Insert a USB drive that contains the backup file.

Calibration/Cleaning menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the

Calibration/Cleaning menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 2-17 Calibration/Cleaning menu

First level Second level

Cleaning Settings Auto Cleaning

Cleaning Page

Calibrate Scanner

Cleaning Interval

Cleaning Size

Values

Off *

On

Print

ENWW

Device Maintenance menu

45

USB Firmware Upgrade menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the

USB Firmware Upgrade menu.

Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the onscreen instructions.

Service menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the

Service menu.

The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized service personnel.

46 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW

3 Software for Windows

Supported operating systems for Windows

Supported printer drivers for Windows

Select the correct printer driver for Windows

Priority for print settings

Change printer-driver settings for Windows

Remove software for Windows

Supported utilities for Windows

Software for other operating systems

ENWW 47

Supported operating systems for Windows

The product supports the following Windows operating systems:

Windows XP Service Pack 2 or greater (32-bit and 64-bit)

Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)

Windows Server 2008 (32-bit and 64-bit)

Windows Server 2008 R2 (64-bit)

Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)

Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)

The installation program on the software CD that came with the product supports the following

Windows operating systems:

Windows XP Service Pack 2 or greater (32-bit)

Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 or greater (32-bit)

Windows Server 2008 (32-bit and 64-bit)

Windows Server 2008 R2 (64-bit)

Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)

Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)

NOTE:

You also can install the product software on 64-bit Windows XP and 64-bit Windows Server

2003 operating systems by using the Windows Add Printer feature.

48 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW

Supported printer drivers for Windows

HP PCL 6 (this is the default printer driver that is installed from the software installation CD)

HP postscript emulation Universal Print Driver (HP UPD PS)

HP PCL 5 Universal Print Driver (HP UPD PCL 5)

HP PCL 6 Universal Print Driver (HP UPD PCL 6)

The printer drivers include online Help that has instructions for common printing tasks and also describes the buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver.

NOTE:

For more information about the UPD, see www.hp.com/go/upd .

ENWW

Supported printer drivers for Windows

49

Select the correct printer driver for Windows

Printer drivers provide access to the product features and allow the computer to communicate with the product (using a printer language). The following printer drivers are available at www.hp.com/ support/ljm4555mfp_software .

HP PCL 6 driver

HP UPD PS driver

HP UPD PCL 5 driver

HP UPD PCL 6 driver

Provided as the default driver on the software installation CD. This driver is automatically installed unless you download a different one from the Web.

Recommended for all Windows environments

Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and product-feature support for most users

Developed to align with the Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for the best speed in Windows environments

Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs that are based on PCL 5

● Recommended for printing with Adobe ® software programs or with other highly graphics-intensive software programs

Provides support for printing from postscript emulation needs, or for postscript flash font support

Recommended for general office printing in Windows environments

Compatible with previous PCL versions and older HP LaserJet products

The best choice for printing from third-party or custom software programs

The best choice when operating with mixed environments, which require the product to be set to PCL 5 (UNIX, Linux, mainframe)

Designed for use in corporate Windows environments to provide a single driver for use with multiple printer models

Preferred when printing to multiple printer models from a mobile Windows computer

Recommended for printing in all Windows environments

● Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and printer feature support for most users

Developed to align with Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for best speed in Windows environments

May not be fully compatible with third-party and custom solutions based on

PCL5

50 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW

HP Universal Print Driver (UPD)

The HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) for Windows is a single driver that gives you instant access to virtually any HP LaserJet product, from any location, without downloading separate drivers. It is built on proven HP print driver technology and has been tested thoroughly and used with many software programs. It is a powerful solution that performs consistently over time.

The HP UPD communicates directly with each HP product, gathers configuration information, and then customizes the user interface to show the product’s unique, available features. It automatically enables features that are available for the product, such as two-sided printing and stapling, so you do not need to enable them manually.

For more information, go to www.hp.com/go/upd .

UPD installation modes

Traditional mode

Dynamic mode

Use this mode if you are installing the driver from a CD for a single computer.

When installed from the CD that comes with the product, UPD operates like traditional printer drivers. It operates with a specific product.

If you use this mode, you must install UPD separately for each computer and for each product.

To use this mode, download UPD from the Internet. See www.hp.com/go/ upd .

Dynamic mode allows you to use a single driver installation, so you can discover and print to HP products in any location.

Use this mode if you are installing UPD for a workgroup.

ENWW

Select the correct printer driver for Windows

51

Priority for print settings

Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:

NOTE:

The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.

Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here override settings changed anywhere else.

Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower priority and usually do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.

Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver): Click Properties in the Print dialog box to open the printer driver. Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box usually do not override settings anywhere else in the printing software. You can change most of the print settings here.

Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog boxes.

Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority than changes made anywhere else.

52 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW

Change printer-driver settings for Windows

Change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the driver, and then click Properties or Preferences.

The steps can vary; this procedure is most common.

Change the default settings for all print jobs

1.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the

default Start menu view): Click Start, and then click Printers and Faxes.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the

Classic Start menu view): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.

Windows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware

and Sound click Printer.

Windows 7: Click Start, and then click Devices and Printers.

2.

Right-click the driver icon, and then select Printing Preferences.

Change the product configuration settings

1.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the

default Start menu view): Click Start, and then click Printers and Faxes.

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the

Classic Start menu view): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.

Windows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware

and Sound click Printer.

Windows 7: Click Start, and then click Devices and Printers.

2.

Right-click the driver icon, and then select Properties or Printer properties.

3.

Click the Device Settings tab.

ENWW

Change printer-driver settings for Windows

53

4.

To automatically set the configuration settings, in the Installable Options list, click the

Automatic Configuration drop-down menu, and then click the Update Now menu item.

54 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW

Remove software for Windows

Windows XP

1.

Click Start, Control Panel, and then Add or Remove Programs.

2.

Find and select the product from the list.

3.

Click the Change/Remove button to remove the software.

Windows Vista

1.

Click Start, Control Panel, and then Programs and Features.

2.

Find and select the product from the list.

3.

Select the Uninstall/Change option.

Windows 7

1.

Click Start, Control Panel, and then under the Programs heading, click Uninstall a

program.

2.

Find and select the product from the list.

3.

Select the Uninstall option.

ENWW

Remove software for Windows

55

Supported utilities for Windows

HP Web Jetadmin

HP Web Jetadmin is a simple print and imaging peripheral management software tool that helps optimize product use, control color costs, secure products, and streamline supplies management by enabling remote configuration, proactive monitoring, security troubleshooting, and reporting of printing and imaging products.

To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems, visit www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin .

When installed on a host server, a Windows client can gain access to HP Web Jetadmin by using a supported Web browser (such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer) by navigating to the HP Web Jetadmin host.

HP Embedded Web Server

The product is equipped with the HP Embedded Web Server, which provides access to information about product and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Microsoft

Internet Explorer, Netscape Navigator, Apple Safari, or Mozilla Firefox.

The HP Embedded Web Server resides on the product. It is not loaded on a network server.

The HP Embedded Web Server provides an interface to the product that anyone who has a networkconnected computer and a standard Web browser can use. No special software is installed or configured, but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer. To gain access to the

HP Embedded Web Server, type the IP address for the product in the address line of the browser. (To find the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page, see

Print information pages on page 248 ).

For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the HP Embedded Web Server, see

Use the HP Embedded Web Server on page 249 .

56 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW

Software for other operating systems

OS

UNIX

Linux

SAP devices

Software

For HP-UX and Solaris networks, go to www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software to install model scripts using the HP Jetdirect printer installer (HPPI) for UNIX.

For the latest model scripts, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts .

For information, go to www.hplip.net

or www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting .

For drivers, go to www.hp.com/go/sap/drivers .

For information, go to www.hp.com/go/sap/print .

ENWW

Software for other operating systems

57

58 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW

4 Use the product with Mac

Software for Mac

Print with Mac

Solve problems with a Mac

ENWW 59

Software for Mac

Supported operating systems for Mac

The product supports the following Mac operating systems:

Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, and later

NOTE:

For Mac OS X 10.5 and later, Intel® Core™ Processor Macs are supported.

The Mac printer driver can be installed from the software installation CD that came with the product. If the CD is unavailable, the Mac printer driver and installation CD can be downloaded from the Web.

Supported printer drivers for Mac

The HP LaserJet software installer provides PostScript ® Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog

Extensions (PDEs), and the HP Utility for use with Mac OS X computers. The HP printer PPD and PDE files, in combination with the built-in Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide full printing functionality and access to specific HP printer features.

Install software for Mac operating systems

Install software for Mac computers connected directly to the product

This product supports a USB 2.0 connection. Use an A-to-B type USB cable. HP recommends using a cable that is no longer than 2 m (6.5 ft).

1.

Install the software from the CD.

2.

Click the product icon, and follow the onscreen instructions.

3.

Click the Close button.

4.

When the software prompts you, connect the USB cable to the product and the computer.

60 Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW

5.

To configure the product software to recognize the installed accessories, complete these steps:

Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6

1. From the Apple menu , click the System Preferences menu and then click the Print & Fax icon.

2. Select the product in the left side of the window.

3. Click the Options & Supplies button.

4. Click the Driver tab.

5. Configure the installed options.

NOTE:

For Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6, the installation procedure should automatically configure the installed options.

6.

Print a page from any program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.

NOTE:

If the installation failed, reinstall the software.

Install software for Mac computers on a wired network

Configure the IP address

1.

Make sure the product is turned on and that the Ready message appears on the control-panel display.

2.

Connect the network cable to the product and to the network.

3.

Wait for 60 seconds before continuing. During this time, the network recognizes the product and assigns an IP address or host name for the product.

4.

At the product control panel, touch the Network Address button to identify the product IP address or host name.

ENWW

Software for Mac

61

If the Network Address button is not visible, you can find the IP address or host name by printing a configuration page.

a. At the product control panel, scroll to and touch the

Administration button.

b. Open the following menus:

Reports

Configuration/Status Pages

Configuration Page

c.

Touch the View button to view the information on the control panel, or touch the Print button to print the pages.

d. Find the IP address on the Jetdirect page.

62

5.

IPv4: If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, or 192.0.0.192, or 169.254.x.x, you must manually configure the IP address. Otherwise, the network configuration was successful.

IPv6: If the IP address begins with "fe80:", the product should be able to print. If not, you must manually configure the IP address.

Install the software

1.

Quit all programs on the computer.

2.

Install the software from the CD.

3.

Click the product icon, and follow the onscreen instructions.

4.

Click the Close button when the installation is complete.

5.

At the computer, open the Apple menu , click the System Preferences menu, and then click the Print & Fax icon.

6.

Click the plus symbol (+).

Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW

By default, Mac OS X uses the Bonjour method to find the driver and add the product to the printer pop-up menu. This method is best in most situations. If Mac OS X cannot find the HP printer driver, an error message displays. Reinstall the software.

If you are connecting the product to a large network, you might need to use IP printing to connect rather than Bonjour. Follow these steps:

a. Click the IP Printer button.

b. From the Protocol drop-down list, select the HP Jetdirect-Socket option. Enter the IP address or host name for the product. From the Print Using drop-down list, select the product model if one is not already selected.

7.

To configure the product to recognize the installed accessories, complete these steps:

Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6

1. From the Apple menu , click the System Preferences menu and then click the Print & Fax icon.

2. Select the product in the left side of the window.

3. Click the Options & Supplies button.

4. Click the Driver tab.

5. Configure the installed options.

NOTE:

For Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6, the installation procedure should automatically configure the installed options.

8.

Print a page from any program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.

Remove software from Mac operating systems

You must have administrator rights to remove the software.

1.

Disconnect the product from the computer.

2.

Open Applications.

3.

Select Hewlett Packard.

4.

Select HP Uninstaller.

5.

Select the product from the list of devices, and then click the Uninstall button.

6.

After the software is uninstalled, restart the computer and empty the Trash.

ENWW

Software for Mac

63

Priority for print settings for Mac

Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:

NOTE:

The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.

Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here might override settings changed anywhere else.

Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.

Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog boxes.

Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority than changes made anywhere else.

Change printer-driver settings for Mac

Change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed

1.

On the File menu, click the Print button.

2.

Change the settings that you want on the various menus.

Change the default settings for all print jobs

1.

2.

On the File menu, click the Print button.

Change the settings that you want on the various menus.

3.

On the Presets menu, click the

Save As… option and type a name for the preset.

These settings are saved in the Presets menu. To use the new settings, you must select the saved preset option every time you open a program and print.

Change the product configuration settings

Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6

1.

From the Apple menu , click the

System Preferences menu and then click the Print & Fax icon.

2.

Select the product in the left side of the window.

3.

Click the Options & Supplies button.

4.

Click the Driver tab.

5.

Configure the installed options.

64 Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW

Software for Mac computers

HP Utility for Mac

Use the HP Utility to set up product features that are not available in the printer driver.

You can use the HP Utility when the product uses a universal serial bus (USB) cable or is connected to a

TCP/IP-based network.

Open the HP Utility

From the dock, click HP Utility.

-or-

From Applications, click Hewlett Packard, and then click HP Utility.

HP Utility features

The HP Utility consists of pages that you open by clicking in the Configuration Settings list. The following table describes the tasks that you can perform from these pages. At the top of any page, click the HP Support link to access technical assistance, online supplies ordering, online registration, and recycling and return information.

Menu

Information And

Support

Printer Settings

Item

Supplies Status

Device Information

Color Usage

File Upload

Upload Fonts

Update Firmware

Commands

Trays Configuration

Duplex Mode

Stored Jobs

E-mail Alerts

Network Settings

Supplies

Management

Description

Shows the product supplies status and provides links for online supplies-ordering.

Shows information about the currently selected product.

Shows the total pages printed, the number of pages printed in color, and the number of pages printed in black only.

Transfers files from the computer to the product.

Transfers font files from the computer to the product.

Transfers a firmware update file to the product.

Sends special characters or print commands to the product after the print job.

Changes the default tray settings.

Turns on the automatic two-sided printing mode.

Manages print jobs that are stored on the product hard disk.

Configures the product to send e-mail notices for certain events.

Configures the network settings, such as the IPv4 and IPv6 settings.

Configures how the product should behave when supplies are nearing the end of their estimated life.

ENWW

Software for Mac

65

Menu Item

Restrict Color

Protect Direct Ports

Additional Settings

Description

Configures color-printing restrictions for specific users and software programs.

NOTE:

This option is available only after you open the View menu and select the Show Advanced option.

Disables printing over USB or parallel ports.

Provides access to the HP Embedded Web Server.

Supported utilities for Mac

HP Embedded Web Server

The product is equipped with the HP Embedded Web server, which provides access to information about product and network activities. Access the HP Embedded Web Server from the HP Utility. Open the Printer Settings menu, and then select the Additional Settings option.

66 Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW

Print with Mac

Cancel a print job with Mac

1.

If the print job is currently printing, cancel it by following this procedure:

a. Press the Stop button on the product control panel.

b. From the list on the touchscreen, touch the print job you want to delete, and touch the

Cancel

Job button.

c.

The product prompts you to confirm the deletion. Touch the Yes button.

2.

You can also cancel a print job from a software program or a print queue.

Software program: Typically, a dialog box appears briefly on the computer screen, allowing you to cancel the print job.

Mac print queue: Open the print queue by double-clicking the product icon in the Dock.

Highlight the print job, and then click Delete.

Change the paper size and type with Mac

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click the Print option.

2.

In the Copies & Pages menu, click the Page Setup button.

3.

Select a size from the Paper Size drop-down list, and then click the OK button.

4.

Open the Finishing menu. (Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6)

5.

Select a type from the Media-type drop-down list.

6.

Click the Print button.

Create and use printing presets with Mac

Use printing presets to save the current printer driver settings for reuse.

Create a printing preset

1.

On the File menu, click the Print option.

2.

Select the driver.

3.

Select the print settings that you want to save for reuse.

4.

In the Presets menu, click the Save As… option, and type a name for the preset.

5.

Click the OK button.

ENWW

Print with Mac

67

Use printing presets

1.

On the File menu, click the Print option.

2.

Select the driver.

3.

In the Presets menu, select the printing preset.

NOTE:

To use printer-driver default settings, select the standard option.

Resize documents or print on a custom paper size with Mac

Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6

Use one of these methods.

1.

On the File menu, click the Print option.

2.

Click the Page Setup button.

3.

Select the product, and then select the correct settings for the Paper Size and

Orientation options.

1.

On the File menu, click the Print option.

2.

Open the Paper Handling menu.

3.

In the Destination Paper Size area, click the Scale to fit paper size box, and then select the size from the drop-down list.

Print a cover page with Mac

1.

On the File menu, click the Print option.

2.

Select the driver.

3.

Open the Cover Page menu, and then select where to print the cover page. Click either the

Before Document button or the After Document button.

4.

In the Cover Page Type menu, select the message that you want to print on the cover page.

NOTE:

To print a blank cover page, select the standard option from the Cover Page Type menu.

Use watermarks with Mac

1.

On the File menu, click the Print option.

2.

Open the Watermarks menu.

3.

From the Mode menu, select the type of watermark to use. Select the Watermark option to print a semi-transparent message. Select the Overlay option to print a message that is not transparent.

4.

From the Pages menu, select whether to print the watermark on all pages or on the first page only.

68 Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW

5.

From the Text menu, select one of the standard messages, or select the Custom option and type a new message in the box.

6.

Select options for the remaining settings.

Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper with Mac

1.

On the File menu, click the Print option.

2.

Select the driver.

3.

Open the Layout menu.

4.

From the Pages per Sheet menu, select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet (1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16).

5.

In the Layout Direction area, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.

6.

From the Borders menu, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.

Print on both sides (duplex) with Mac

1.

Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job.

2.

On the File menu, click the Print option.

3.

Open the Layout menu.

4.

From the Two-Sided menu, select a binding option.

Store jobs with Mac

You can store jobs on the product so you can print them at any time. You can share stored jobs with other users, or you can make them private.

1.

On the File menu, click the Print option.

2.

Open the Job Storage menu.

ENWW

Print with Mac

69

3.

In the Job Storage Mode drop-down list, select the type of stored job.

Proof and Hold: This feature provides a quick way to print and proof one copy of a job and then print more copies.

Personal Job: When you send a job to the product, the job does not print until you request it at the product control panel. If you assign a personal identification number (PIN) to the job, you must provide the required PIN at the control panel.

Quick Copy: If the optional hard disk is installed on the product, you can print the requested number of copies of a job and then store a copy of the job on the optional hard disk. Storing the job allows you to print additional copies of the job later.

Stored Job: If the optional hard disk is installed on the product, you can store a job such as a personnel form, time sheet, or calendar on the product and allow other users to print the job at any time. Stored jobs also can be protected by a PIN.

4.

To use a custom user name or job name, click the Custom button, and then enter the user name or the job name.

Select which option to use if another stored job already has that name.

Use Job Name + (1 - 99)

Replace Existing File

Append a unique number to the end of the job name.

Overwrite the existing stored job with the new one.

5.

If you selected the Stored Job or Personal Job option in step 3, you can protect the job with a

PIN. Type a 4-digit number in the Use PIN to Print field. When other people attempt to print this job, the product prompts them to enter this PIN number.

70 Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW

Solve problems with a Mac

See

Solve product software problems with Mac on page 309

.

ENWW

Solve problems with a Mac

71

72 Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW

5 Connect the product

Printer sharing disclaimer

Connect with USB

Connect to a network

ENWW 73

Printer sharing disclaimer

HP does not support peer-to-peer networking, as the feature is a function of Microsoft operating systems and not of the HP printer drivers. Go to Microsoft at www.microsoft.com

.

Connect with USB

This product supports a USB 2.0 connection. Use an A-to-B type USB cable. HP recommends using a cable that is no longer than 2 m (6.5 ft).

CAUTION:

Do not connect the USB cable until the installation software prompts you to connect it.

CD installation

1.

Quit all open programs on the computer.

2.

Install the software from the CD, and follow the onscreen instructions.

3.

When prompted, select the Directly connect to this computer using USB cable option, and then click the Next button.

4.

When the software prompts you, connect the USB cable to the product and the computer.

74

5.

At the end of the installation, click the Finish button, or click the More Options button to install more software.

6.

On the More Options screen, you can install more software, or click the Exit button.

7.

Print a page from any program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.

NOTE:

If the installation failed, reinstall the software.

Chapter 5 Connect the product ENWW

Connect to a network

You can configure network parameters from the control panel, the HP Embedded Web Server, or for most networks, from the HP Web Jetadmin software.

NOTE:

HP Web Jetadmin software is not supported on Mac OS X operating systems.

For a complete list of supported networks and for instructions on configuring network parameters from software, see the HP Jetdirect Embedded Print Server Administrator’s Guide. The guide comes with products in which an HP Jetdirect embedded print server is installed.

Supported network protocols

Table 5-1 Supported network protocols

Network type Supported protocols

TCP/IP IPv4 and IPv6 networks

TCP/IP IPv4 networks only

Apple Bonjour

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) v1, v2, and v3

Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP)

Secure HTTP (HTTPS)

File Transfer Protocol (FTP)

Port 9100

Line printer daemon (LPD)

Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)

Secure IPP

Web Services Dynamic Discovery (WS Discovery)

IPsec/Firewall

Auto IP

Service Location Protocol (SLP)

Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)

Telnet

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) v2

Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)/DHCP

Windows Internet Name Service (WINS)

IP Direct Mode

WS Print

ENWW

Connect to a network

75

Table 5-1 Supported network protocols (continued)

Network type Supported protocols

TCP/IP IPv6 networks only

Other supported network protocols

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) v6

Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol (MLD) v1

Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) v6

Internetwork Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange (IPX/SPX)

AppleTalk

NetWare Directory Services (NDS)

Bindery

Novell Distributed Print Services (NDPS)

● iPrint

Table 5-2 Advanced Security features for network management

Service name Description

IPsec/Firewall

Kerberos

SNMP v3

SSL/TLS

IPsec batch configuration

Provides network-layer security on IPv4 and IPv6 networks. A firewall provides simple control of IP traffic. IPsec provides additional protection through authentication and encryption protocols.

Allows you to exchange private information across an open network by assigning a unique key, called a ticket, to each user who logs on to the network. The ticket is then embedded in messages to identify the sender.

Employs a user-based security model for SNMP v3, which provides user authentication and data privacy through encryption.

Allows you to transmit private documents via the Internet and guarantee privacy and data integrity between the client and server applications.

Provides network-layer security through the simple control of IP traffic to and from the product. This protocol provides the benefits of encryption and authentication and allows for multiple configurations.

Install the product on a wired network

Configure the IP address

1.

Make sure the product is turned on and that the Ready message appears on the control-panel display.

76 Chapter 5 Connect the product ENWW

2.

Connect the network cable to the product and to the network.

3.

Wait for 60 seconds before continuing. During this time, the network recognizes the product and assigns an IP address or host name for the product.

4.

At the product control panel, touch the Network Address button to identify the product IP address or host name.

If the Network Address button is not visible, you can find the IP address or host name by printing a configuration page.

a. At the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

b. Open the following menus:

Reports

Configuration/Status Pages

Configuration Page

c.

Touch the View button to view the information on the control panel, or touch the Print button to print the pages.

d. Find the IP address on the Jetdirect page.

ENWW

5.

IPv4: If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, or 192.0.0.192, or 169.254.x.x, you must manually configure the IP address. Otherwise, the network configuration was successful.

Connect to a network

77

IPv6: If the IP address begins with "fe80:", the product should be able to print. If not, you must manually configure the IP address.

Install the software

1.

Quit all programs on the computer.

2.

Install the software from the CD.

3.

Follow the onscreen instructions.

4.

When prompted, select the Connected through a wired network option.

5.

From the list of available printers, select the printer that has the correct IP address.

6.

At the end of the installation, click the Finish button, or click the More Options button to install more software or configure basic digital sending features for the product.

Install the HP PC Send Fax driver to enable sending faxes from your computer. (Fax models only)

Use the HP Scan to Email Setup Wizard to configure basic E-mail settings.

Use the HP Save to Folder Setup Wizard to set up a shared folder on the network where you can store scanned documents.

7.

Print a page from any program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.

78 Chapter 5 Connect the product ENWW

Configure network settings

View or change network settings

Use the embedded Web server to view or change IP configuration settings.

1.

Print a configuration page, and locate the IP address.

If you are using IPv4, the IP address contains only digits. It has this format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

If you are using IPv6, the IP address is a hexadecimal combination of characters and digits. It has a format similar to this: xxxx::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

2.

To open the embedded Web server, type the IP address into the address line of a Web browser.

3.

Click the Networking tab to obtain network information. You can change settings as needed.

Set or change the network password

Use the embedded Web server to set a network password or change an existing password.

1.

Open the embedded Web server, click the Networking tab, and click the Security link.

NOTE:

If a password has previously been set, you are prompted to type the password. Type the password, and then click the Apply button.

2.

Type the new password in the New Password box and in the Verify password box.

3.

At the bottom of the window, click the Apply button to save the password.

ENWW

Connect to a network

79

Manually configure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel

Use the control-panel Administration menus to manually set an IPv4 address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open each of the following menus:

a.

Network Settings

b.

Embedded Jetdirect Menu

c.

TCP/IP

d.

IPV4 Settings

e.

Config Method

f.

Manual

g.

Manual Settings

h.

IP Address , Subnet Mask , or Default Gateway

3.

Use the keypad to specify the IP address, subnet mask, or default gateway.

80 Chapter 5 Connect the product ENWW

Manually configure IPv6 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel

Use the control-panel Administration menus to manually set an IPv6 address.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

To enable manual configuration, open each of the following menus:

a.

Network Settings

b.

Embedded Jetdirect Menu

c.

TCP/IP

d.

IPV6 Settings

e.

Address

f.

Manual Settings

g.

Enable

Select the On option, and then touch the Save button.

3.

To configure the address, open each of the following menus:

Network Settings

Embedded Jetdirect Menu

TCP/IP

IPV6 Settings

Address

Use the keypad to enter the address.

NOTE:

If you are using the arrow buttons, you must press the OK button after entering each digit.

ENWW

Connect to a network

81

82 Chapter 5 Connect the product ENWW

6 Paper and print media

Understand paper use

Change the printer driver to match the paper type and size in Windows

Supported paper sizes

Supported paper types

Load paper trays

Configure trays

Select an output bin (for models with a stapler/stacker)

ENWW 83

Understand paper use

This product supports a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in this user guide. Paper or print media that does not meet these guidelines might cause poor print quality, increased jams, and premature wear on the product.

For best results, use only HP-brand paper and print media designed for laser printers or multiuse. Do not use paper or print media made for inkjet printers. Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of other brands of media because HP cannot control their quality.

It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this user guide and still not produce satisfactory results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and/or humidity levels, or other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.

CAUTION:

Using paper or print media that does not meet Hewlett-Packard's specifications might cause problems for the product, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard warranty or service agreements.

Special paper guidelines

This product supports printing on special media. Use the following guidelines to obtain satisfactory results. When using special paper or print media, be sure to set the type and size in the printer driver to obtain the best results.

CAUTION:

HP LaserJet products use fusers to bond dry toner particles to the paper in very precise dots. HP laser paper is designed to withstand this extreme heat. Using inkjet paper could damage the product.

Media type

Envelopes

Labels

Transparencies

Do Do not

Store envelopes flat.

Use envelopes where the seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.

Use peel-off adhesive strips that are approved for use in laser printers.

Do not use envelopes that are wrinkled, nicked, stuck together, or otherwise damaged.

Do not use envelopes that have clasps, snaps, windows, or coated linings.

Do not use self-stick adhesives or other synthetic materials.

Use only labels that have no exposed backing between them.

Use labels that lie flat.

Do not use labels that have wrinkles or bubbles, or are damaged.

Do not print partial sheets of labels.

Use only full sheets of labels.

Use only transparencies that are approved for use in color laser printers.

Place transparencies on a flat surface after removing them from the product.

Do not use transparent print media not approved for laser printers.

84 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

Media type

Letterhead or preprinted forms

Heavy paper

Do Do not

Use only letterhead or forms approved for use in laser printers.

Use only heavy paper that is approved for use in laser printers and meets the weight specifications for this product.

Do not use raised or metallic letterhead.

Do not use paper that is heavier than the recommended media specification for this product unless it is HP paper that has been approved for use in this product.

Change the printer driver to match the paper type and size in Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Paper/Quality tab.

4.

Select a size from the Paper size drop-down list.

5.

Select a paper type from the Paper type drop-down list.

6.

Click the OK button.

ENWW

Change the printer driver to match the paper type and size in Windows

85

Supported paper sizes

NOTE:

To obtain best results, select the correct paper size and type in the printer driver before printing.

Table 6-1 Supported paper and print media sizes

Size and dimensions Tray 1 Tray 2 Optional Trays

3, 4, and 5

Automatic duplex printing

Letter

216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in)

Legal

216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)

Executive

184 x 267 mm (7.24 x 10.51 in)

Statement

140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in)

8.5 x 13

216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)

3 x 5

76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in)

4 x 6

101.6 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 in)

10 x 15 cm

101.6 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 in)

5 x 7

127 x 188 mm (5 x 7 in)

5 x 8

127 x 203 mm (5 x 8 in)

A4

210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 in)

A5

148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in)

A6

105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 in)

86 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

Table 6-1 Supported paper and print media sizes (continued)

Size and dimensions Tray 1 Tray 2

B5 (JIS)

182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 in)

B6 (JIS)

128 x 182 mm (5.03 x 7.16 in)

16K

195 x 270 mm (7.67 x 10.62 in)

184 x 260 mm (7.24 x 10.23 in)

197 x 273 mm (7.75 x 10.74 in)

Postcard (JIS)

100 x 148 mm (3.93 x 5.82 in)

Double Postcard (JIS)

148 x 200 mm (5.82 x 7.87 in)

Custom

76 x 127 mm to 216 x 356 mm (3 x 5 in to

8.5 x 14 in)

Custom

148 x 210 mm to 216 x 356 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in to 8.5 x 14 in)

Envelope #9

98 x 225 mm (3.85 x 8.85 in)

Envelope #10

105 x 241 mm (4.13 x 9.48 in)

Envelope Monarch

98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in)

Envelope B5

176 x 250 mm (6.92 x 9.84 in)

Envelope C5

162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 in)

Envelope C6

162 x 114 mm (6.37 x 4.48 in)

1

Optional Trays

3, 4, and 5

Automatic duplex printing

ENWW

Supported paper sizes

87

Table 6-1 Supported paper and print media sizes (continued)

Size and dimensions Tray 1 Tray 2 Optional Trays

3, 4, and 5

Automatic duplex printing

Envelope DL ISO

110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 in)

1 The product can print on 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in) size paper from Tray 1 for Extra Heavy (131-175 g/m

(176-220 g/m 2 ) paper types.

2 ) and Cardstock

88 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

Supported paper types

Paper type Tray 1 Tray 2 Optional Trays 3,

4, and 5

Automatic duplex printing

Plain Paper

Light (60–74 g/m

2

)

Cardstock (176–220 gm

2

)

Transparency

Labels

Letterhead

Envelope

1

Preprinted

Prepunched

Colored

Bond

Recycled

Rough

1

Also supported for the optional envelope feeder.

ENWW

Supported paper types

89

Load paper trays

Tray and bin capacity

Tray or bin

Tray 1

Paper type

Paper

Tray 2

Envelopes

Labels

Transparencies

Paper

Transparencies

Optional Trays 3,

4, and 5

Paper

Output bin

Transparencies

Paper

Document feeder Paper

Specifications

Range:

Quantity

Maximum stack height: 10 mm

(0.39 in)

60 g/m

2

(16 lb) bond to 200 g/ m 2 (53 lb) bond

Equivalent to 100 sheets of 75 g/ m

2

(20 lb) bond

Less than 60 g/m

2

(16 lb) bond to 90 g/m 2 (24 lb) bond

Maximum 0.23 mm (0.01 in) thick

Up to 10 envelopes

Maximum stack height: 10 mm

(0.39 in)

Minimum 0.13 mm (0.01 in) thick Maximum stack height: 10 mm

(0.39 in)

Range:

60 g/m m

2

2

(16 lb) bond to 120 g/

(32 lb) bond

Up to 50 sheets

Maximum stack height: 56 mm

(2.2 in)

Equivalent to 500 sheets of 75 g/ m

2

(20 lb) bond

Maximum stack height for 10 x

15 cm (4 x 6 in) size paper:

15 mm (0.59 in)

Minimum 0.13 mm (0.01 in) thick Maximum stack height: 56 mm

(2.2 in)

Range: Equivalent to 500 sheets of 75 g/ m

2

(20 lb) bond

60 g/m 2 (16 lb) bond to 120 g/ m

2

(32 lb) bond

Maximum stack height: 56 mm

(2.2 in)

Minimum 0.13 mm (0.01 in) thick Maximum stack height: 56 mm

(2.2 in)

Range:

Up to 500 sheets of 75 g/m

(20 lb) bond

2

60 g/m 2 (16 lb) bond to 200 g/ m 2 (53 lb) bond

Range:

Up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m

(20 lb) bond

2

60 g/m

2

(16 lb) bond to 220 g/ m

2

(59 lb) bond

90 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

ENWW

Tray or bin

Envelope feeder

Paper type

Envelopes

Top and middle output bins

Paper

Bottom output bin Paper

Envelopes

Labels

Transparencies

Stapling/stacker Paper

Duplexer Paper

Specifications

Range:

Minimum: 90 mm (3.5 in) x

148 mm (5.82 in)

Maximum: 178 mm (7.0) x

254 mm (10.0)

COM 10

Monarch

B5 176 mm (6.9 in) x

250 mm (10.0 in)

C5 162 mm (6.4 in) x

229 mm (9.0 in)

DL 110 mm (4.3 in) x

220 mm (8.7 in)

Quantity

Up to 75 envelopes

60 g/m 2 (16 lb) bond to 120 g/ m 2 (32 lb) bond

Range:

Up to 125 sheets of 75 g/m

(20 lb) bond

2

Up to 650 sheets of 75 g/m 2

(20 lb) bond

60 g/m 2 (16 lb) bond to 200 g/ m 2 (53 lb) bond

Range:

Minimum: 90 mm (3.5 in) x

148 mm (5.82 in)

Maximum: 178 mm (7.0) x

254 mm (10.0)

Maximum 0.23 mm (0.01 in) thick

Minimum 0.13 mm (0.01 in) thick

60 g/m

2

(16 lb) bond to 120 g/ m 2 (32 lb) bond

Stapling capacity: 30 sheets of

75 g/m 2 (20 lb) bond

60 g/m 2 (16 lb) bond to 120 g/ m 2 (32 lb) bond

Bin capacity for staple jobs: 15 stapled jobs of 30 sheets of

75 g/m 2 (20 lb) bond

Load paper trays

91

Paper orientation for loading trays

If you are using paper that requires a specific orientation, load it according to the information in the following tables.

NOTE:

The Alternative Letterhead Mode and Image Rotation settings affect the way you load letterhead or preprinted paper. The following information depicts the default setting.

Paper orientation for loading Tray 1

Paper type Single-sided printing, no stapler/stacker

Duplex printing, no stapler/stacker

Letterhead, preprinted, or prepunched

Face-up

Top edge leading into the product

Face-down

Bottom edge leading into the product

Single-sided printing with the stapler/ stacker

Face-up

Bottom edge leading into the product

Duplex printing with the stapler/stacker

Face-down

Top edge leading into the product

Envelopes Face-up

Short, postage-edge leading into the product

Face-up

Short, postage-edge leading into the product

92 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

Paper orientation for loading Tray 2 or Trays 3, 4, and 5

Paper type

Letterhead, preprinted, or prepunched

Single-sided printing

Face-down

Top edge at the right of the tray

Duplex printing

Face-up

Top edge at the right of the tray

ENWW

Load paper trays

93

Load Tray 1

CAUTION:

To avoid jams, never add or remove paper from Tray 1 during printing.

1.

Open Tray 1.

2.

Pull out the tray extension to support the paper and set the side guides to the correct width.

3.

Load paper in the tray.

94 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

4.

Make sure the stack fits under the tabs on the guides and does not exceed the load-level indicators.

5.

Adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack but do not bend it.

Load Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 with standard-size paper

1.

Open the tray.

NOTE:

Do not open the tray while it is in use.

ENWW

Load paper trays

95

2.

Adjust the paper-length and paper-width guides by squeezing the adjustment latches and sliding the guides to the size of the paper being used.

3.

Load paper into the tray. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack, but do not bend it.

NOTE:

To prevent jams, do not overfill the tray. Be sure the top of the stack is below the tray full indicator.

NOTE:

If the tray is not adjusted correctly, an error message might appear during printing or the paper might jam.

4.

Close the tray.

5.

The control panel shows the tray’s paper type and size. If the configuration is not correct, follow the instructions on the control panel to change the size or type.

96 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

Load Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 with custom-size paper

1.

Open the tray.

2.

Adjust the paper-length and paper-width guides by squeezing the adjustment latches and sliding the guides to the size of the paper being used.

3.

Load paper into the tray. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack, but do not bend it.

ENWW

Load paper trays

97

4.

Close the tray.

5.

The control panel prompts you to set the paper size and type. Select the Custom setting, and then configure the X and Y dimensions of the custom paper size.

NOTE:

See the label in the paper tray, or the following illustration, to determine the X and Y dimensions.

Y

X

98 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

Configure trays

The product automatically prompts you to configure a tray for type and size in the following situations:

When you load paper into the tray

When you specify a particular tray or paper type for a print job through the printer driver or a software program and the tray is not configured to match the print-job’s settings

NOTE:

The prompt does not appear if you are printing from Tray 1, and it is configured for the Any

Size paper size and the Any Type paper type settings. In this situation, if the print job does not specify a tray, the product prints from Tray 1, even if the paper size and type settings in the print job do not match the paper loaded in Tray 1.

Configure a tray when loading paper

1.

Load paper in the tray. Close the tray if you are using Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5.

2.

The tray configuration message appears.

3.

Touch the OK button to accept the detected size and type, or touch the Modify button to choose a different paper size or type.

4.

Select the correct size and type and then touch the OK button.

Configure a tray to match print job settings

1.

In the software program, specify the source tray, the paper size, and the paper type.

2.

Send the job to the product.

If the tray needs to be configured, the tray configuration message appears.

3.

Load the tray with the specified type and size of paper, and then close the tray.

4.

Touch the OK button to accept the detected size and type, or touch the Modify button to choose a different paper size or type.

5.

Select the correct size and type and then touch the OK button.

Configure a tray by using the control panel

You can also configure the trays for type and size without a prompt from the product.

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Trays button.

2.

Touch the line for the tray that you want to configure, and then touch the Modify button.

3.

Select the paper size and paper type from the lists of options.

4.

Touch the OK button to save your selection.

ENWW

Configure trays

99

Select the paper by source, type, or size

In the Microsoft Windows operating system, three settings affect how the printer driver tries to pull media when you send a print job. Source, Type, and Size settings appear in the Page Setup, Print, or Print Properties dialog boxes in most software programs. Unless you change these settings, the product automatically selects a tray using the default settings.

Source

To print by source, select a specific tray in the printer driver for the product to pull from. If you select a tray that is configured for a type or size that does not match your print job, the product prompts you to load the tray with the type or size of paper for your print job before printing it. When you load the tray, the product begins printing.

Type and size

Printing by type or size causes the product to pull from the tray that is loaded with the correct type and size of paper.

Selecting paper by type rather than source helps protect special paper from accidental use.

Using the wrong setting might result in unsatisfactory print quality. Always print by type for special print media, such as labels or transparencies.

Print by type or size for envelopes, if possible.

To print by type or size, select the type or size from the Page Setup dialog box, the Print dialog box, or the Print Properties dialog box, depending on the software program.

If you often print on a certain type or size of paper, configure a tray for that type or size. Then, when you select that type or size as you print a job, the product automatically pulls paper from the tray that is configured for that type or size.

100 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

Select an output bin (for models with a stapler/ stacker)

You can configure the product to use different output bins for printing, copying, and faxing. You can also configure the product to sort jobs according to the username associated with each job, or to stack all jobs from the lower bin to the upper bin.

NOTE:

You can also select output bins from the printer driver. Selections that you make in the printer driver override control-panel settings.

2

1

3

1

2

3

Upper-left bin

Middle-left bin

Lower-left bin

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration menu.

2.

Open each of the following menus:

Stapler/Stacker Settings

Operation Mode

3.

To configure the product to sort jobs into different bins according to product function, select the

Function Separator option. Touch the OK button.

NOTE:

You can also select the Mailbox option to sort jobs according to the username associated with the job.

Select the Stacker option to stack all jobs into the lower output bin first. When the lower bin is full, jobs stack into the middle bin, and then into the upper bin.

ENWW

Select an output bin (for models with a stapler/stacker)

101

4.

To configure the bin for copy jobs, open these menus, and then select a bin from the list of options.

Administration

Copy Settings

Output Bin

5.

To configure the bin for printing incoming faxes, open these menus:

Administration

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Default Job Options

Output Bin

Select a bin from the list of options.

NOTE:

All stapled jobs always go to the lower bin.

NOTE:

For print jobs, select the output bin in the printer driver.

102 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW

7 Manage supplies

Print cartridge information

Supplies views

Manage print cartridges

Replacement instructions

Solve problems with supplies

ENWW 103

Print cartridge information

Feature

Part numbers

Accessibility

Environmental features

Description

Standard-capacity black print cartridge: CE390A

Selectability number: 90A

High-capacity black print cartridge: CE390X

Selectability number: 90X

The print cartridge can be installed and removed by using one hand.

Recycle the print cartridge by using the HP Planet Partners return and recycling program.

For more information about supplies, go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies .

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. For the latest user guide information, go to www.hp.com/support/ljcp1520series_manuals .

104 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW

Supplies views

Print cartridge views

1

3

2

1

2

3

4

Plastic shield

Print cartridge memory tag

Toner sealing tape tab

Imaging drum

4

ENWW

Supplies views

105

Manage print cartridges

Settings for print cartridges

Print when a print cartridge is at estimated end of life

A Black Cartridge Low message appears when the print cartridge is nearing the estimated end of its useful life.

A Black Cartridge Very Low message appears when the print cartridge is at its estimated end of useful life.

Print-quality problems can occur when using a supply that is at its estimated end of life.

Once an HP supply has reached Very Low, HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that supply has ended.

Enable or disable the Very Low Settings options from the control panel

You can enable or disable the default settings at any time, and you do not have to re-enable them when you install a new print cartridge.

1.

From the Home screen on the control panel, touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Manage Supplies

Supply Settings

Black Cartridge

Very Low Settings

3.

Select one of the following options:

Select the Continue option to set the product to alert you that the print cartridge is very low, but to continue printing.

Select the Stop option to set the product to stop printing (including printing faxes) until you replace the print cartridge.

Select the Prompt to continue option to set the product to stop printing (including printing faxes) and prompt you to replace the print cartridge. You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing.

When the product is set to the Stop option, there is some risk that faxes will not print after the new cartridge is installed if your product has received more faxes than the memory can hold while stopped.

When the product is set to the Prompt to continue option, there is some risk that faxes will not print after the new cartridge is installed if your product has received more faxes than the memory can hold while the product is waiting for the prompt to be acknowledged.

106 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW

Once an HP supply has reached very low, HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that supply has ended. All print defects or cartridge failures incurred when an HP supply is used when the Very Low

Settings item is set to the Continue mode will not be considered to be defects in materials or workmanship in the supply under the HP Print Cartridge Warranty Statement.

Store and recycle supplies

Recycle supplies

To recycle a genuine HP print cartridge, place the used cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge arrived. Use the enclosed return label to send the used supply to HP for recycling. For complete information, see the recycling guide that is included with each new HP supply item, or go to www.hp.com/recycle .

Print-cartridge storage

Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.

CAUTION:

To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes.

HP policy on non-HP print cartridges

Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or remanufactured.

NOTE:

Any damage caused by a non-HP print cartridge is not covered under the HP warranty and service agreements.

HP anticounterfeit Web site

Go to www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit when you install an HP print cartridge and the control-panel message says the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.

Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following:

The supplies status page indicates that a non-HP supply is installed.

You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge.

The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the packaging differs from

HP packaging).

ENWW

Manage print cartridges

107

Replacement instructions

Replace the print cartridge

CAUTION:

If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water.

Hot water sets toner into fabric.

NOTE:

Information about recycling used print cartridges is on the print-cartridge box.

1.

Pull the top cover release lever to open the top cover.

2.

Grasp the handle of the used print cartridge and pull out to remove.

3.

Store the used print cartridge in a protective bag. Information about recycling used print cartridges is on the print-cartridge box.

108 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW

4.

Remove the new print cartridge from its protective bag.

NOTE:

Be careful not to damage the memory tag (callout 1) on the print cartridge.

5.

Grasp both sides of the print cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the print cartridge five or six times.

6.

Remove the orange, plastic shipping lock from the bottom of the new print cartridge.

ENWW

Replacement instructions

109

7.

Pull on the orange tab to remove the toner sealing tape. Completely remove the sealing tape from the cartridge.

CAUTION:

Avoid prolonged exposure to light.

8.

Align the print cartridge with its slot and insert the print cartridge until it clicks into place.

9.

Close the top cover.

110 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW

Replace the staple cartridge (for models with a stapler/stacker)

1.

Press the release latch, and then slide the stapler/stacker away from the product.

2.

Open the staple-cartridge door.

3.

Lift up on the staple-cartridge green handle, and then pull the cartridge out of the stapler to remove it.

ENWW

Replacement instructions

111

4.

Insert a new staple cartridge, push down on it to snap it into place, and then close the staplecartridge door.

5.

Slide the stapler/stacker toward the product until it latches in place.

112 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW

Solve problems with supplies

Check the print cartridge

Check the print cartridge, and replace it if necessary, if you are having any of the following problems:

The printing is too light or seems faded in areas.

Printed pages have small unprinted areas.

Printed pages have streaks or bands.

NOTE:

If you are using a draft or EconoMode print setting, the printing might appear light. HP does not recommend the full time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full time, the toner supply might outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer acceptable, consider replacing the print cartridge

If you determine that you need to replace the print cartridge, print the supplies status page to find the part number for the correct genuine HP print cartridge.

Type of print cartridge

Refilled or remanufactured print cartridge

Genuine HP print cartridge

Steps to resolve the problem

Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP supplies, either new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their quality. If you are using a refilled or remanufactured print cartridge and are not satisfied with the print quality, replace the cartridge with a genuine HP cartridge.

1.

The product control panel or the supplies status page indicates Very Low status when the cartridge has reached the end of its estimated useful life. Replace the print cartridge if print quality is no longer acceptable.

2.

Visually inspect the print cartridge for damage. See the instructions that follow. Replace the print cartridge if necessary.

3.

If printed pages have marks that repeat several times at the same distance apart, print a cleaning page. If this does not solve the problem, use the repeating defects information in this document to identify the cause of the problem.

Inspect the print cartridge for damage

1.

Remove the print cartridge from the product, and verify that the sealing tape has been removed.

2.

Check the memory chip for damage.

ENWW

Solve problems with supplies

113

3.

Examine the surface of the green imaging drum on the bottom of the print cartridge.

CAUTION:

Do not touch the green roller (imaging drum) on the bottom of the cartridge.

Fingerprints on the imaging drum can cause print-quality problems.

4.

If you see any scratches, fingerprints, or other damage on the imaging drum, replace the print cartridge.

5.

If the imaging drum does not appear to be damaged, rock the print cartridge gently several times and reinstall it. Print a few pages to see if the problem has resolved.

Repeating defects

If defects repeat at regular intervals on the page, use a ruler to identify the cause of the defect. Place the top of the ruler at the first defect. The marking that is beside the next occurrence of the defect indicates which component needs to be replaced.

Distance between defects

37.7 mm (1.5 in)

47 mm (1.85 in)

63 mm (2.5 in)

79 mm (3.1 in)

94 mm (3.75 in)

Product components that cause the defect

Primary charging roller

Transfer roller

Developer roller

Tray 1 pickup roller

Tray 1 feed roller

Tray 1 separation roller

Tray 2 feed roller

Tray 2 pickup roller

Tray 2 separation roller

Fuser sleeve unit or pressure roller

Photosensitive drum

114 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW

Print the supplies status page

The supplies status page indicates the estimated life remaining in print cartridges. It also lists the part number for the correct genuine HP print cartridge for your product so you can order a replacement print cartridge, as well as other useful information.

1.

Open the following menus:

Administration

Reports

Configuration/Status Pages

2.

Select the Supplies Status option, and then touch the Print button to print the report.

Interpret control panel messages for supplies

The following table contains important information about supplies status messages.

Table 7-1 Supplies status messages

Control panel message Description

10.XX.YY Supply memory error

The product cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge memory chip or a memory chip is missing from a print cartridge.

Recommended action

Reinstall the print cartridge, or install a new print cartridge.

Black Cartridge low

Black Cartridge very low

XX values

00 = Memory chip memory error

10 = Memory chip missing

YY values

00 = Black print cartridge

The product indicates when a supply level is low. Actual print cartridge life might vary.

You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.

The product indicates when a supply level is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. Consider purchasing a replacement cartridge so it is available when the installed cartridge has reached the end of its estimated life.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. Consider purchasing a replacement cartridge so it is available when the installed cartridge has reached the end of its estimated life.

ENWW

Solve problems with supplies

115

Table 7-1 Supplies status messages (continued)

Control panel message

Fuser Kit low

Fuser Kit very low

Incompatible fuser

Incompatible supplies

Replace black cartridge

Replace fuser kit

Description Recommended action

The fuser kit is low. The actual supply life remaining might vary. Consider having a replacement fuser kit available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable.

You do not need to replace the fuser kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.

The fuser kit is very low. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the fuser kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the fuser kit. Instructions are included with the fuser kit.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the fuser kit. Instructions are included with the fuser kit.

The fuser is not compatible with this product.

CAUTION:

The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

1.

Open the left door.

2.

Remove the incompatible fuser.

3.

Install the correct fuser.

4.

Close the left door.

Print cartridges or other supply items are installed that were not designed for this product. The product cannot print with these supplies installed.

The product indicates when a supply level is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life,

HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that supply ends.

Touch the Supplies button to identify the incompatible supplies. Install supplies that are designed for this product.

Replace the print cartridge.

Or, configure the product to continue printing by using the Manage Supplies menu.

The product indicates when the fuser kit is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Have a replacement fuser kit available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The fuser kit does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. After the fuser kit reaches its approximated end of life,

HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that fuser kit ends.

CAUTION:

The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

1.

3.

Open the right door.

2.

Grasp the blue handles on both sides of the fuser and pull straight out to remove it.

Install the new fuser.

4.

Close the right door.

116 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW

Table 7-1 Supplies status messages (continued)

Control panel message

Replace supplies

Supplies low

Supplies very low

Description

Two or more supplies are at the estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Consider having replacement supplies available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that supply ends.

This message appears when at least two supplies have reached the low threshold. The actual supply life remaining might vary.

Touch the Supplies button to see which supplies are low. You do not need to replace the supplies at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

This message appears when at least two supplies have reached the very low threshold. Touch the Supplies button to see which supplies are low. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the supplies at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

Recommended action

Touch the Supplies button to see which supplies need to be replaced.

Or, configure the product to continue printing by using the menu.

Manage Supplies

To continue printing, either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the Manage Supplies menu on the control panel.

To continue printing, either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the Manage Supplies menu on the control panel.

Unsupported supply installed

Used supply in use

The print cartridge is for a different HP product.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge.

The print cartridge has been previously used. If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/ anticounterfeit .

ENWW

Solve problems with supplies

117

118 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW

8 Print tasks

Cancel a print job with Windows

Basic print tasks with Windows

Additional print tasks with Windows

Walk-up USB printing

ENWW 119

Cancel a print job with Windows

NOTE:

If the print job is too far into the printing process, you might not have the option to cancel it.

1.

If the print job is currently printing, cancel it by following this procedure:

a. Press the Stop button on the control panel.

b. From the list on the touchscreen, touch the print job you want to delete, and touch the Cancel

Job button.

c.

The product prompts you to confirm the deletion. Touch the Yes button.

2.

You can also cancel a print job from a software program or a print queue.

Software program: Typically, a dialog box appears briefly on the computer screen, allowing you to cancel the print job.

Windows print queue: If a print job is waiting in a print queue (computer memory) or print spooler, delete the job there.

Windows XP, Server 2003, or Server 2008: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes. Double-click the product icon to open the window, right-click the print job that you want to cancel, and then click Cancel.

Windows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then, under Hardware

and Sound, click Printer. Double-click the product icon to open the window, rightclick the print job that you want to cancel, and then click Cancel.

Windows 7: Click Start, and then click Devices and Printers. Double-click the product icon to open the window, right-click the print job that you want to cancel, and then click Cancel.

120 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

Basic print tasks with Windows

Open the printer driver with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

ENWW

Basic print tasks with Windows

121

Get help for any printing option with Windows

1.

Click the Help button to open the online Help.

Change the number of print copies with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then select the number of copies.

122 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

Save custom print settings for reuse with Windows

Use a printing shortcut with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

ENWW

Basic print tasks with Windows

123

3.

Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.

4.

Select one of the shortcuts, and then click the

OK button.

NOTE:

When you select a shortcut, the corresponding settings change on the other tabs in the printer driver.

Create printing shortcuts

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

124 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.

4.

Select an existing shortcut as a base.

NOTE:

Always select a shortcut before adjusting any of the settings on the right side of the screen. If you adjust the settings and then select a shortcut, all your adjustments are lost.

ENWW

Basic print tasks with Windows

125

5.

Select the print options for the new shortcut.

6.

Click the Save As button.

7.

Type a name for the shortcut, and click the OK button.

126 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

Improve print quality with Windows

Select the page size with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Paper/Quality tab.

4.

Select a size from the Paper size drop-down list.

Select a custom page size with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Paper/Quality tab.

4.

Click the Custom button.

5.

Type a name for the custom size, specify the dimensions, and click the OK button.

Select the paper type with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Paper/Quality tab.

4.

From the Paper type drop-down list, click the More… option.

5.

Expand the list of Type is: options.

6.

Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper, and then click the paper type that you are using.

Select the paper tray with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Paper/Quality tab.

4.

Select a tray from the Paper source drop-down list.

ENWW

Basic print tasks with Windows

127

Print on both sides (duplex) with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

128 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

3.

Click the Finishing tab.

4.

Select the Print on both sides check box.

Click the OK button to print the job.

Print on 10 x 15 cm (4 x 6 in) paper with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Paper/Quality tab.

4.

From the Paper size drop-down list, select either the 4x6 or 10x15cm size.

5.

From the Paper source drop-down list, select the Tray 1 option.

6.

From the Paper type drop-down list, click the

More… option.

ENWW

Basic print tasks with Windows

129

7.

Expand the list of Type is: options.

8.

Expand the list of Photo/Cover 176-220g paper types, and select the paper type that you are using.

Print multiple pages per sheet with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Finishing tab.

130 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

4.

Select the number of pages per sheet from the

Pages per sheet drop-down list.

5.

Select the correct Print page borders,

Page order, and Orientation options.

Select page orientation with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

ENWW

Basic print tasks with Windows

131

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Finishing tab.

4.

In the Orientation area, select the Portrait or Landscape option.

To print the page image upside down, select the Rotate by 180 degrees option.

132 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

Additional print tasks with Windows

Print on preprinted letterhead or forms with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Paper/Quality tab.

ENWW

Additional print tasks with Windows

133

4.

From the Paper type drop-down list, click the

More… option.

5.

Expand the list of Type is: options.

134 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

6.

Expand the list of Other options.

7.

Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.

Print on special paper, labels, or transparencies

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

ENWW

Additional print tasks with Windows

135

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Paper/Quality tab.

4.

From the Paper type drop-down list, click the

More… option.

136 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

5.

Expand the list of Type is: options.

6.

Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper.

NOTE:

Labels and transparencies are in the list of Other options.

7.

Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.

ENWW

Additional print tasks with Windows

137

Print the first or last page on different paper with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Paper/Quality tab.

138 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

4.

In the Special pages area, click the Print

pages on different paper option, and then click the Settings button.

5.

In the Pages in document area, select either the First or Last option.

6.

Select the correct options from the Paper

source and Paper type drop-down lists.

Click the Add button.

ENWW

Additional print tasks with Windows

139

7.

If you are printing both the first and last pages on different paper, repeat steps 5 and 6, selecting the options for the other page.

8.

Click the OK button.

Scale a document to fit page size with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

140 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Effects tab.

4.

Select the Print document on option, and then select a size from the drop-down list.

ENWW

Additional print tasks with Windows

141

Add a watermark to a document with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Effects tab.

4.

Select a watermark from the Watermarks drop-down list.

Or, to add a new watermark to the list, click the Edit button. Specify the settings for the watermark, and then click the OK button.

5.

To print the watermark on the first page only, select the First page only check box. Otherwise, the watermark is printed on each page.

Create a booklet with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

142 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

3.

Click the Finishing tab.

4.

Select the Print on both sides check box.

5.

In the Booklet layout drop-down list, click the Left binding or Right binding option.

The Pages per sheet option automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet.

ENWW

Additional print tasks with Windows

143

Select output options with Windows (fskm models only)

Select an output bin with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

144 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

3.

Click the Output tab.

4.

In the Output Bin Options area, select a bin from the Bin drop-down list.

Select staple options with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

ENWW

Additional print tasks with Windows

145

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Output tab.

4.

In the Output Options area, select an option from the Staple drop-down list.

146 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

Use job storage features with Windows

The following job-storage modes are available for print jobs:

Proof and Hold: This feature provides a quick way to print and proof one copy of a job and then print more copies.

Personal Job: When you send a job to the product, the job does not print until you request it at the product control panel. If you assign a personal identification number (PIN) to the job, you must provide the required PIN at the control panel.

Quick Copy: If the optional hard disk is installed on the product, you can print the requested number of copies of a job and then store a copy of the job on the optional hard disk. Storing the job allows you to print additional copies of the job later.

Stored Job: If the optional hard disk is installed on the product, you can store a job such as a personnel form, time sheet, or calendar on the product and allow other users to print the job at any time. Stored jobs also can be protected by a PIN.

CAUTION:

If you turn off the product, all Quick Copy, Proof and Hold, and Personal Job types of stored jobs are deleted. To permanently store the job and prevent the product from deleting it when space is needed for something else, select the Stored Job option in the driver.

Create a stored job with Windows

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the

Properties or Preferences button.

ENWW

Additional print tasks with Windows

147

3.

Click the Job Storage tab.

4.

Select a Job Storage Mode option.

Print a stored job

Use the following procedure to print a job that is stored in the product memory.

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Open from

Device Memory button.

148 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

2.

Select the name of the folder where the job is stored.

3.

Select the name of the job, adjust the number of copies, and then touch the Start button to print the job.

4.

If the job is locked, type the PIN in the PIN field, adjust the number of copies, and then touch the Start button to print the job.

Delete a stored job with Windows

When you send a stored job to the product memory, the product overwrites any previous jobs with the same user and job name. If a job is not already stored under the same user and job name, and the product needs additional space, the product might delete other stored jobs starting with the oldest. You can change the number of jobs that can be stored from the General Settings menu on the product control panel.

Use this procedure to delete a job that is stored in the product memory.

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Open from Device Memory button.

2.

Select the name of the folder where the job is stored.

3.

Select the name of the job, and then touch the Delete button.

4.

If the job is locked, type the PIN in the PIN field, and then touch the Delete button.

Set job storage options with Windows

Print one copy for proof before printing all the copies

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

ENWW

Additional print tasks with Windows

149

3.

Click the Job Storage tab.

4.

In the Job Storage Mode area, click the Proof and Hold option.

Temporarily store a private job on the product and print it later

NOTE:

The product deletes the job after you print it.

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Job Storage tab.

4.

In the Job Storage Mode area, click the Personal Job option.

5.

Optional: In the Make Job Private area, click the PIN to print option, and enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

6.

Print the job at any time from the product control panel.

Temporarily store a job on the product

NOTE:

This option is available if the optional hard disk is installed in the product.

NOTE:

The product stores the job until you turn the product off.

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Job Storage tab.

4.

In the Job Storage Mode area, click the Quick Copy option.

The requested number of copies are printed immediately, and you can print more copies from the product control panel.

Permanently store a job on the product

NOTE:

This option is available if the optional hard disk is installed in the product.

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Job Storage tab.

4.

In the Job Storage Mode area, click the Stored Job option.

150 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

Make a permanently stored job private so that anyone who tries to print it must provide a

PIN

NOTE:

This option is available if the optional hard disk is installed in the product.

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Job Storage tab.

4.

In the Job Storage Mode area, click the Stored Job option or the Personal Job option.

5.

In the Make Job Private area, click the PIN to print option, and enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

NOTE:

To print the job or to delete it, you must provide the PIN at the product control panel.

Receive notification when someone prints a stored job

NOTE:

Only the person who created the stored job receives notification. You do not receive notification when someone prints a stored job that another person has created.

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Job Storage tab.

4.

Select the job storage mode that you want.

5.

In the Job Notifications Options area, click the Display Job ID when printing option.

Set the user name for a stored job

Follow this procedure to change the user name for a stored job.

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

3.

Click the Job Storage tab.

4.

Select the job storage mode that you want.

5.

In the User Name area, click the User name option to use the Windows default user name. To provide a different user name, click the Custom option and type the name.

Specify a name for the stored job

Follow this procedure to change the default name for a stored job.

1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

2.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

ENWW

Additional print tasks with Windows

151

3.

Click the Job Storage tab.

4.

Select the job storage mode that you want.

5.

To automatically generate the job name associated with the stored document, in the Job Name area, click the Automatic option. The driver uses the document file name, if it is available. If the document has no file name, the driver uses the software program name or a time stamp for the job name.

To specify a job name, click the Custom option and type the name.

6.

Select an option from the If job name exists drop-down list.

Select the Use Job Name + (1-99) option to add a number to the end of the existing name.

Select the Replace Existing File option to overwrite a job that already has that name.

Print special jobs with Windows

Set the duplex alignment

For documents that are printed on both sides, such as brochures, set the registration for the tray before printing to ensure that the front and back of the page are aligned.

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

a.

General Settings

b.

Print Quality

c.

Image Registration

d.

Adjust Tray <X>

3.

Touch the Print Test Page setting, and then touch the OK button.

4.

Follow the instructions on the test page to complete the adjustment.

152 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

Walk-up USB printing

This product features walk-up USB printing, so you can quickly print files without sending them from a computer. The product accepts standard USB storage accessories in the USB port on the front of the product. You can print the following types of files:

.pdf

.prn

.pcl

.ps

.cht

1.

Insert the USB storage accessory into the USB port on the front of the product.

NOTE:

You might need to remove the cover from the USB port

2.

The Open from USB screen opens. Select a folder from the list on the left side of the screen.

3.

Select the name of the document that you want to print.

ENWW

Walk-up USB printing

153

4.

If you need to adjust the number of copies, touch the Copies field, and then use the keypad to select the number of copies.

5.

Touch the Start button to print the document.

154 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW

9 Copy

Use copy functions

Copy settings

Copy a book

Copy a photo

Create a stored copy job

Copy mixed-size originals

Copy on both sides (duplex)

Use Job Build mode

ENWW 155

Use copy functions

Copy

Use the scanner glass to make as many as 9999 copies of small, lightweight paper (less than 60 g/m or 16 lb) or heavy paper (more than 105 g/m

2

or 28 lb). This includes paper such as receipts, newspaper clippings, photographs, old documents, worn documents, and books.

2

Use the document feeder to make as many as 9999 copies of a document that has up to 50 pages

(depending on the thickness of the pages).

1.

To copy from the scanner glass, place the original document face-down on the glass. Align the corner of the original with the upper-left corner of the glass.

2.

To copy from the document feeder, place the document into the document feeder with the pages facing up.

3.

To make copies by using the default copy options, use the keypad on the control panel to select the number of copies, and touch the Start button.

156 Chapter 9 Copy ENWW

Cancel a copy job

1.

Press the Stop button on the control panel and then touch the name of the job.

2.

Touch the Cancel Job button, and then touch the OK button.

Reduce or enlarge a copy image

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.

2.

Touch the Reduce/Enlarge button.

3.

Select one of the predefined percentages, or touch the Scaling field and type a percentage between 25 and 400. Touch the OK button.

You can also select these options:

Auto : The product automatically scales the image to fit the paper size in the tray.

Auto Include Margins : The product reduces the image slightly to fit the entire scanned image within the printable area on the page.

NOTE:

To reduce the image, select a scaling percentage that is less than 100. To enlarge the image, select a scaling percentage that is greater than 100.

4.

Touch the Start button.

ENWW

Use copy functions

157

Collate a copy job

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.

2.

Touch the Collate button or the Staple/Collate button.

3.

Touch the Collate on (Sets in page order) option.

4.

Touch the Start button.

158 Chapter 9 Copy ENWW

Copy settings

Change copy quality

Optimize the copy image for text or pictures

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.

2.

Touch the More Options button, and then touch the Optimize Text/Picture button.

3.

Select one of the predefined options, or touch the Manually adjust button and then adjust the slider in the Optimize For area. Touch the OK button.

4.

Touch the Start button.

Check the scanner glass for dirt or smudges

NOTE:

If streaks or other defects appear only on copies made by using the document feeder, clean the scanner strip with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.

The scanner strip is located along the left-hand side of the scanner glass. It is not necessary to clean the entire scanner glass.

Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing, which can affect performance. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner glass and white plastic backing.

ENWW

Copy settings

159

1.

Use the power switch to turn off the product, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.

2.

Open the scanner lid.

160 Chapter 9 Copy ENWW

3.

Clean the scanner glass and the white plastic backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner. Dry the glass and white plastic backing with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.

CAUTION:

Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can damage the product. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the product.

NOTE:

Carefully clean the small glass strip to the left of the scanner glass. Small marks on this glass result in streaks on copies made from the document feeder.

4.

Plug in the product, and then use the power switch to turn on the product.

Adjust the copy lightness/darkness

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.

2.

Touch the Image Adjustment button.

ENWW

Copy settings

161

3.

Adjust the sliders to set the Darkness level, the

Contrast , the Sharpness level, and the

Background Cleanup level. Touch the OK button.

4.

Touch the Start button.

162 Chapter 9 Copy ENWW

Define custom copy settings

You can use the Administration menu to establish default settings that apply to all copy jobs. If necessary, you can override most settings for an individual job. After that job is complete, the product returns to the default settings.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration menu.

2.

Open the Copy Settings menu.

3.

Several options are available. You can configure defaults for all options, or for only some options.

NOTE:

To learn about each menu option, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the screen for that option.

Set the paper size and type for copying on special paper

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.

2.

Touch the Paper Selection button.

3.

Select the tray that holds the paper that you want to use, and then touch the OK button.

ENWW

Copy settings

163

Restore copy default settings

1.

From the Home screen, open the following menus:

Administration

General Settings

Restore Factory Settings

2.

Select the Copy check box, and then touch the Reset button.

164 Chapter 9 Copy ENWW

Copy a book

1.

Lift the lid and place the book on the scanner glass with the upper-left corner of the book in the upper-left corner of the glass.

2.

Gently close the lid.

3.

On the control panel, touch the Copy button.

4.

Touch the Start button.

5.

Repeat these steps for each page that you want to copy.

NOTE:

This product does not have the capability to distinguish left and right pages. Assemble the copied pages carefully.

ENWW

Copy a book

165

Copy a photo

NOTE:

Copy photos from the scanner glass.

1.

Lift the lid and place the photo on the scanner glass with the picture-side down and the upper-left corner of the photo in the upper-left corner of the glass.

2.

Gently close the lid.

3.

On the control panel, touch the Copy button.

4.

Touch the Optimize Text/Picture button, and select the Photograph button.

5.

Touch the Start button.

166 Chapter 9 Copy ENWW

Create a stored copy job

Use this procedure to scan a document and save it on the product so you can print copies at any time.

1.

Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the document feeder.

2.

From the Home screen, touch the Save to Device Memory button.

NOTE:

If prompted, type your user name and password.

3.

Select an existing folder, or touch the New Folder button to create a new folder.

4.

Type the name for the file in the File Name text field, and select the file type from the File Type drop-down list.

5.

To configure settings for the document, touch the More Options button.

6.

Touch the Start button to save the file.

ENWW

Create a stored copy job

167

Copy mixed-size originals

You can copy original documents that are printed on different sizes of paper as long as the sheets of paper have one common dimension. For example, you could combine Letter and Legal sizes.

1.

Arrange the sheets in the original document so they all have the same width.

2.

Place the sheets face-up into the document feeder, and adjust both paper guides against the document.

3.

On the control panel, touch the Copy button.

4.

Touch the Original Size button.

NOTE:

If this option is not on the first screen, touch the More Options button until the option displays.

5.

Select the Mixed Letter/Legal button, and then touch the OK button.

6.

Touch the Start button.

168 Chapter 9 Copy ENWW

Copy on both sides (duplex)

1.

Load the original documents into the document feeder with the first page facing up, and with the top of the page leading.

2.

On the control panel, touch the Copy button.

3.

Touch the Sides button.

ENWW

Copy on both sides (duplex)

169

4.

To make a two-sided copy from a one-sided original, touch the 1-sided original, 2-sided output button.

To make a two-sided copy from a two-sided original, touch the 2-sided original, 2-sided output button.

To make a one-sided copy from a two-sided original, touch the 2-sided original, 1-sided output button.

Touch the OK button.

5.

Touch the Start button.

170 Chapter 9 Copy ENWW

Use Job Build mode

Use the Job Build feature to combine several sets of original documents into one copy job. Also use this feature to copy an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at one time.

1.

Load the original document face-up in the document feeder or face-down on the scanner glass.

2.

On the control panel, touch the Copy button.

3.

Scroll to and touch the Job Build button.

4.

Touch the Job Build on button.

5.

Touch the OK button.

6.

If necessary, select the desired copy options.

7.

Touch the Start button. After each page is scanned, the control panel prompts you for more pages.

8.

If the job contains more pages, load the next page, and then touch the Scan button.

The product temporarily saves all the scanned images. Touch the Finish button to finish printing the copies.

ENWW

Use Job Build mode

171

172 Chapter 9 Copy ENWW

10 Scan and send documents

Set up scan/send features

Use scan/send functions

Send a scanned document

ENWW 173

Set up scan/send features

The product offers the following scan and send features:

Scan and save files to a folder on your network.

Scan and save files to the product hard drive.

Scan and save files to a USB flash drive.

Scan and send documents to one or more e-mail addresses.

Some scan and send features are not available on the product control panel until you use the

HP Embedded Web Server to enable them.

NOTE:

To find detailed information about using the HP Embedded Web Server, click the Help link in the upper-right corner of each HP Embedded Web Server page.

1.

Open a Web page, and type the product IP address in the address line.

2.

When the HP Embedded Web Server opens, click the Scan/Digital Send tab.

3.

If you did not previously use the HP Scan to Email Setup Wizard to set up the E-mail feature, you can enable it by using the HP Embedded Web Server.

a. Click the E-mail Setup link.

b. Select the E-mail check box to enable the feature.

c.

Select the outgoing mail server to use, or click the Add button to add a different server to the list.

NOTE:

If you don't know the name of the mail server, you can usually find it by opening your e-mail program and looking at the outgoing mail configuration settings.

d. In the Address Message area, configure the default setting for the From address.

e. Configuring the other settings is optional.

f.

When you are finished, click the Save Settings button.

4.

Enable the Save to Network Folder feature.

a. Click the Save to Network Folder Setup link.

b. Select the Save to Network Folder check box to enable the feature.

c.

In the Quick Sets area, click the Add button.

d. On the next screen, provide a name and a description for the Quick Set and specify the location where you want the Quick Set to appear on the control panel. Click the Next button.

e. On the next screen, select the type of Quick Set folder to use, and then click the Next button.

174 Chapter 10 Scan and send documents ENWW

f.

Continue through the screens and select the default options you want to apply to the Quick

Set.

g. On the Summary screen, review the settings and then click the Finish button.

5.

Enable the Save to USB feature.

a. Click the Save to USB Setup link.

b. Select the Enable Save to USB check box.

c.

Click the Apply button at the bottom of the page.

ENWW

Set up scan/send features

175

Use scan/send functions

Sign in

Some features on the product control panel can be secured so that unauthorized people cannot use them. When a feature is secured, the product prompts you to sign in before you can use it. You can also sign in without waiting for a prompt by touching the Sign In button on the Home screen.

Typically, you use the same user name and password that you use to sign in to your computer on the network. Consult the network administrator for this product if you have questions about which credentials to use.

After you have signed in to the product a Sign Out button appears on the control panel. To maintain security for the product, touch the Sign Out button when you have finished using the product.

Change default scan/send settings from the product control panel

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the

Administration button.

2.

Open the Scan/Digital Send Settings menu.

3.

Select the category of scan and send settings that you want to configure.

4.

Open the Default Job Options menu, and configure the options. Touch the OK button to save the settings.

176 Chapter 10 Scan and send documents ENWW

Send a scanned document

Send a scanned document to a network folder

The product can scan a file and save it in a folder on the network. The following operating systems support this feature:

Windows Server 2003, 64-bit

Windows Server 2008, 64-bit

Windows XP, 64-bit

Windows Vista, 64-bit

Windows 7, 64-bit

Novell v5.1 and later (access to the Quick Sets folders only)

NOTE:

You might be required to sign in to the product to use this feature.

1.

The system administrator can use the HP Embedded Web Server to configure pre-defined Quick Sets folders, or you can provide the path to another network folder.

Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the document feeder.

2.

From the Home screen, touch the Save to

Network Folder button.

NOTE:

If prompted, type your user name and password.

ENWW

Send a scanned document

177

3.

To use one of the preset job settings, select one of the items in the Quick Sets list.

4.

To set up a new job, type the name for the file in the File Name text field, and type the path to the network folder in the Network Folder

Path field. Use this format for the path:

\\path\path

5.

To configure settings for the document, touch the More Options button.

6.

Touch the Start button to save the file.

Send a scanned document to a folder in the product memory

Use this procedure to scan a document and save it on the product so you can print copies at any time.

178 Chapter 10 Scan and send documents ENWW

1.

Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the document feeder.

2.

From the Home screen, touch the Save to

Device Memory button.

NOTE:

If prompted, type your user name and password.

3.

Select an existing folder, or touch the New

Folder button to create a new folder.

4.

Type the name for the file in the File Name text field.

ENWW

Send a scanned document

179

5.

To configure settings for the document, touch the More Options button.

6.

Touch the Start button to save the file.

Send a scanned document to a USB flash drive

The product can scan a file and save it in a folder on a USB flash drive.

NOTE:

You might be required to sign in to the product to use this feature.

1.

Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the document feeder.

2.

From the Home screen, touch the Save to USB button.

NOTE:

If prompted, type your user name and password.

180 Chapter 10 Scan and send documents ENWW

3.

Select one of the folders in the list, or touch the

New Folder button to create a new folder on the USB flash drive.

4.

Type the name for the file in the File Name text field, and select the file type from the File Type drop-down list.

5.

To configure settings for the document, touch the More Options button.

6.

Touch the Start button to save the file.

Send to e-mail

The product e-mail feature offers the following benefits:

Sends documents to one or more e-mail addresses.

Delivers files in black-and-white or in color.

You can send files in different file formats that the recipient can manipulate.

In order to use the e-mail feature, the product needs to be connected to a valid SMTP local area network that includes Internet access.

Supported protocols

The product supports Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

(LDAP).

ENWW

Send a scanned document

181

SMTP

SMTP is a set of rules that define the interaction between programs that send and receive e-mail.

In order for the product to send documents to e-mail, it must be connected to a LAN that has access to an e-mail server that supports SMTP.

If you are using a LAN connection, contact your system administrator to obtain the IP address or host name for your SMTP server. If you are connecting through a DSL or cable connection, contact the internet service provider to obtain the SMTP server IP address.

LDAP

LDAP is used to gain access to a database of information. When the product uses LDAP, it searches a global list of e-mail addresses. As you begin to type the e-mail address, LDAP uses an auto-complete feature that supplies a list of e-mail addresses that match the characters you type.

As you type additional characters, the list of matching e-mail addresses becomes smaller.

The product supports LDAP, but a connection to an LDAP server is not required in order for the product to be able to send to e-mail.

NOTE:

If you need to change the LDAP settings, you must change them by using the

HP Embedded Web Server.

Configure e-mail server settings

Before you can send a document to e-mail, you must configure the product.

NOTE:

The instructions that follow are for configuring the product at the control panel. You can also perform these procedures by using the HP Embedded Web Server. Using the E-mail Setup Wizard menu is the simplest way to configure the e-mail settings.

NOTE:

The e-mail icon is not shown on the control panel if e-mail is not configured.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the

Administration menu.

2.

Open the Scan/Digital Send Settings menu.

182 Chapter 10 Scan and send documents ENWW

3.

Open the E-mail Settings menu.

4.

Open the E-mail Setup Wizard menu, and follow the on-screen instructions.

Send a scanned document to one or more e-mail addresses

1.

Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the document feeder.

2.

From the Home screen, touch the E-mail button.

NOTE:

If prompted, type your user name and password.

3.

Touch the text box next a field to open a keypad.

NOTE:

If you are signed in to the product, your user name or other default information might appear in the From field. If so, you might not be able to change it.

ENWW

Send a scanned document

183

4.

Type the appropriate information for the field.

To send to multiple addresses, separate the addresses with a semicolon, or touch the Enter button on the touchscreen keypad after you type each address.

5.

To change the settings for the document touch the More Options button.

6.

If you are sending a two-sided document, select the Original Sides menu and select the

2-sided option.

7.

Touch the Start button to begin sending.

Use the address book

You can send e-mail to a list of recipients by using the address book. Depending on how the product is configured, you might have one or more of the following address book viewing options.

All Contacts : Lists all the contacts that are available to you.

Personal Contacts : Lists all the contacts that are associated with your user name. These contacts are not visible to other people who use the product.

NOTE:

You must be signed in to the product to see the Personal Contacts list.

Local Contacts : Lists all the contacts that are stored in the product memory. These contacts are visible to all people who use the product.

Add contacts to the address book from the product control panel

If you are signed in to the product, contacts that you add to the address book will not be visible to other people who use the product.

184 Chapter 10 Scan and send documents ENWW

If you are not signed in to the product, contacts that you add to the address book will be visible to all people who use the product.

NOTE:

You can also use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to create and manage the address book.

1.

From the Home screen, touch the E-mail button.

NOTE:

If prompted, type your user name and password.

2.

Touch the address book button that is next to the To field to open the Address Book screen.

3.

Touch the Add contact button that is in the lower left corner of the screen.

4.

In the Name text field, type the name of the contact.

5.

From the drop-down list, select the E-mail

Address option, and then type the contact's email address.

Touch the OK button to add the contact to the list.

ENWW

Send a scanned document

185

Send a document to e-mail by using the address book

1.

Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the document feeder.

2.

From the Home screen, touch the E-mail button.

NOTE:

If prompted, type your user name and password.

3.

Touch the address book button that is next to the To field to open the Address Book screen.

4.

From the drop-down list, select the address book view that you want to use.

186 Chapter 10 Scan and send documents ENWW

5.

Select a name from the list of contacts, and then touch the right arrow button to add the name to the recipients list.

Repeat this step for each recipient, and then touch the OK button.

6.

Touch the Start button to begin sending.

ENWW

Send a scanned document

187

188 Chapter 10 Scan and send documents ENWW

11 Fax

Set up fax

Set fax settings

Use fax

Solve fax problems

ENWW 189

Set up fax

Introduction

The HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500 enables the HP multifunction product (MFP) to function as a standalone analog fax machine. For more information, see www.hp.com/go/ ljanalogfaxaccessory500_manuals .

NOTE:

In addition to the analog fax feature, the product also supports LAN and internet faxing. Only one fax method can be enabled at a time.

NOTE:

If the product came with the fax accessory installed, remove the fax connection cover, connect the phone cord, and then perform the initial fax configuration. The fax connection cover is located on the phone connector on the formatter rear panel.

HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500 features

Send-fax features

Speed dials

Fax address book

Resolution and image-adjustment options

Billing codes

190 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

Receive-fax features

Advanced fax features

Remote fax configuration

Security features

Stamp received faxes

● Block incoming faxes

Fax polling

Adjustable rings-to-answer

Notification of fax status

JBIG compression

Error correction

Fax archive

Embedded Web server

HP Web Jetadmin

HP MFP Digital Sending Software

Fax-printing schedule

Verify fax operation

When the fax accessory is installed and operating correctly, the fax icon displays on the product control panel. If the fax accessory has just been installed but has not been configured, the fax icon is grayed-out. If this occurs, use the instructions that follow to configure the fax accessory.

Required fax settings

After the fax accessory is installed, you must configure certain settings before you can use the accessory. If these settings are not configured, the fax icon is grayed-out. These settings include:

Country/region

Date/Time

Company Name

Fax Number

Dialing Prefix (optional)

This information is used in the fax header, which is printed on all outgoing faxes.

NOTE:

When first installed, the fax accessory might read some of these settings from the product; therefore, a value may already be set. You should check the values to verify that they are set and correct.

NOTE:

In the U.S. and many other countries/regions, setting the date, time, country/region, phone number, and company name is a legal requirement for fax.

ENWW

Set up fax

191

Fax Setup Wizard

The Fax Setup Wizard guides you through a step-by-step procedure to configure fax settings that are required to use the fax feature. If the settings are not configured, the fax feature is disabled.

The first time the product is turned on with a fax accessory installed, access the Fax Setup Wizard by following these steps:

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Initial Setup button.

2.

Touch the Fax Setup Wizard menu.

3.

Follow the steps in the Fax Setup Wizard to configure the required settings.

4.

When the Fax Setup Wizard finishes, the option to hide the Initial Setup button appears on the

Home screen.

Access the Fax Setup Wizard after initial setup through the control panel by following these steps:

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Setup Wizard

Follow these steps to configure the required fax settings using the Fax Setup Wizard:

1.

Touch your country/region on the first screen of the Fax Setup Wizard and then touch the Next button.

2.

Touch the date and time boxes to enter the date/time, and then touch the Next button.

3.

Touch the Company Name and Fax Number boxes to enter your company name and fax number, and then touch the Next button.

4.

Touch the Dialing Prefix box to enter your dialing prefix, if required, and then touch the Next button.

5.

Confirm your fax configuration settings on the final screen of the Fax Setup Wizard. Touch the

Finish button to complete the Fax Setup Wizard.

-or-

Touch the Back button to move back through the Fax Setup Wizard screens and make changes to your configuration entries.

NOTE:

The settings configured using the Fax Setup Wizard on the control panel override any settings made in the embedded Web server.

192 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

NOTE:

If the Fax Setup menu settings does not appear in the menu listing, LAN or internet fax might be enabled. When LAN or internet fax is enabled, the analog fax accessory is disabled and the fax menu does not display. Only one fax feature, either LAN fax, analog fax or internet fax, can be enabled at a time. The fax icon displays for either fax feature. If you wish to use analog fax when LAN fax is enabled, use the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration Utility or the product embedded

Web server to disable LAN fax.

Set or verify the date and time

The date and time setting for the fax accessory is the same value as the product date and time setting.

This information can be entered using the Fax Setup Wizard, or by following these steps:

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

General Settings

Date/Time Settings

Date/Time

3.

Touch the correct Time Zone setting for your locale.

4.

Touch the Month drop down menu and select a month.

5.

Touch the boxes next to the Date drop down menu to enter the day and year from the keypad.

6.

Touch the boxes below the Time heading to enter the hour and minutes from the keypad and then touch the AM or PM button.

7.

Touch the Adjust for Daylight Savings feature, if necessary.

8.

Touch the Save button to save the settings.

Set or verify the date/time format

The date and time format setting for the fax accessory is in the same format as the product date and time setting. This information can be entered using the Fax Setup Wizard, or by following these steps:

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

General Settings

Date/Time Settings

Date/Time Format

3.

Touch a Date Format option.

4.

Touch a Time Format option.

5.

Touch the Save button to save the settings.

ENWW

Set up fax

193

Set fax settings

Remote fax configuration

In addition to using the product control panel, you can configure the fax accessory remotely by using various software tools. Because the product contains an embedded Web server (EWS), you can configure the fax accessory across the Web by using either a Web browser or HP Web Jetadmin

(WJA). In addition, you can configure the fax accessory across the network with a network-connected computer by using the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration Utility (DSS). These tools provide access to most of the fax accessory configuration settings that available from the product fax menu.

Web browser

The product contains an embedded Web server (EWS). The EWS allows you to use a Web browser to access and set the analog-fax settings.

1.

Type the IP address of the product in the browser URL address bar and press Enter to open the

EWS Configure product screen. To get the IP address of the product, print a product Configuration page.

NOTE:

If DSS is being used, a message appears on EWS indicating that DSS is in control. The only way to change settings is through DSS.

2.

Click the Fax tab. The Fax Send Setup screen displays.

3.

On the Fax Send Setup screen, click Enable Fax Send to enable the fax. Make any changes to the common job settings and to the specific settings for the type of fax being used, and then click the Apply button to accept the settings.

HP Web Jetadmin

To access the product analog-fax settings by using HP Web Jetadmin, perform the following steps. For detailed information about HP Web Jetadmin, see the HP Web Jetadmin Reference Manual.

1.

Start HP Web Jetadmin.

2.

In the At a Glance text box, type the IP address of the product in the Quick Device Find text box, and then click the Go button to see the device status in the right pane. Select Digital

Sending and Fax from the status drop-down menu in that pane.

3.

Configure the options in the Fax Settings section or the Advanced Fax Settings section. For information about a specific setting, select the context help next to the setting.

4.

After you have made changes to the settings, click the Apply button to accept the settings.

In addition to configuring a single product, you can also perform multiple device configuration. Multiple device mode configures several products at once. For information about this feature, see the Web

Jetadmin User Guide available under the Self Help and Documentation tab at www.hp.com/ go/webjetadmin .

194 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration Utility

To access the analog MFP fax settings by using the DSS configuration utility, perform the following steps.

1.

Start the utility (on the computer or server) to open the main screen.

2.

Select the product and click the Configure MFP button on the main screen, and then click the

Send to Fax tab to open the Fax Settings screen.

3.

To enable the fax capabilities on the product, select the Enable Fax Send option. To access

Analog-fax settings, select Internal Modem in the Fax Send Method drop-down list. On the

Common Job Settings tab, make any changes to the settings and click the Apply button to accept the settings. Select the Internal Modem tab to set additional fax settings.

In addition to configuring a single product, you can also configure multiple devices. For more information about the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration Utility, see the HP MFP Digital

Sending Software User Guide or the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Support Guide.

NOTE:

Depending on the capabilities and settings of your fax method, some of these options might not be available or configurable.

Send fax settings

Fax send setup

Use the Fax Send Setup menu to configure the following features:

Fax Setup Wizard

Fax Dialing Settings

General Fax Send Settings

Billing Codes

Fax Setup Wizard

The Fax Setup Wizard guides you through a step-by-step procedure to configure fax settings that are required to use the fax feature. If the settings are not configured, the fax feature is disabled.

The first time the product is turned on with a fax accessory installed, access the fax setup wizard by following these steps:

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Initial Setup button.

2.

Touch the Fax Setup Wizard menu.

3.

Follow the steps in the Fax Setup Wizard to configure the required settings.

4.

When the Fax Setup Wizard finishes, the option to hide the Initial Setup button appears on the

Home screen.

ENWW

Set fax settings

195

Access the Fax Setup Wizard after initial setup through the control panel by following these steps:

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Setup Wizard

Follow these steps to configure the required fax settings using the Fax Setup Wizard:

1.

Touch your country/region on the first screen of the Fax Setup Wizard and then touch the Next button.

2.

Touch the date and time boxes to enter the date/time, and then touch the Next button.

3.

Touch the Company Name and Fax Number boxes to enter your company name and fax number, and then touch the Next button.

4.

Touch the Dialing Prefix box to enter your dialing prefix, if required, and then touch the Next button.

5.

Confirm your fax configuration settings on the final screen of the Fax Setup Wizard. Touch the

Finish button to complete the Fax Setup Wizard.

-or-

Touch the Back button to move back through the Fax Setup Wizard screens and make changes to your configuration entries.

NOTE:

The settings configured using the Fax Setup Wizard on the control panel override any settings made in the embedded Web server.

NOTE:

If the Fax Setup menu settings does not appear in the menu listing, LAN fax might be enabled. When LAN fax is enabled, the analog fax accessory is disabled and the fax menu does not display. Only one fax feature, either LAN fax, analog fax or internet fax, can be enabled at a time. The fax icon displays for either fax feature. If you wish to use analog fax when LAN fax is enabled, use the

HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration Utility to disable LAN fax.

196 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

Fax dialing settings

Set the fax dial volume

Use the Fax Dial Volume setting to control the product's dialing volume level when sending faxes.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Dialing Settings

3.

Touch the Fax Dial Volume drop-down menu and select one of the following settings:

Off

Low (default)

High

4.

Touch the Save button to save the fax volume setting.

Set the dialing mode

The dialing mode setting sets the type of dialing that is used: either tone (touch-tone phones) or pulse

(rotary-dial phones).

To set the dialing mode, perform the following steps.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Dialing Settings

3.

Touch the Dialing Mode drop down menu and select either the Tone option (default) or Pulse option to set the fax dialing mode.

4.

Touch the Save button.

ENWW

Set fax settings

197

Set fax send speed

The fax send speed setting sets the modem bit rate (measured in bits per second) of the analog fax modem while sending a fax.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Dialing Settings

3.

Touch the drop down menu under the Fax Send Speed heading and then touch one of the following:

Fast (default) — 33600 bps (bits per second)

Medium — 14400 bps

Slow — 9600 bps

4.

Touch the Save button.

Set the redial interval

The redial interval setting selects the number of minutes between retries if the number dialed is busy or not answering.

NOTE:

You might observe a redial message on the control panel when both the Redial-on-Busy and Redial-on-No-Answer settings are set to off. This occurs when the fax accessory dials a number, establishes a connection, and then loses the connection. As a result of this error condition, the fax accessory performs two automatic redial attempts regardless of the redial settings (the first one at

26,400 bps and, if that fails, a second one at 14,400 bps). During this redial operation, a message appears on the control panel to indicate that a redial is in progress.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Dialing Settings

3.

Touch the Redial Interval text box to display the keypad.

4.

Enter the value (1-5, default is 5) and touch the OK button.

5.

Touch the Save button.

198 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

Set redial on error

The Redial on error feature sets the number of times a fax number will be redialed when an error occurs during a fax transmission.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Dialing Settings

3.

Touch the Redial on error box to open the keypad.

4.

Enter a value (0-9, default is 2) and then touch the OK button.

5.

Touch the Save button.

Set redial-on-busy

The redial-on-busy setting selects the number of times (0 through 9) the fax accessory redials a number when the number is busy. The interval between retries is set by the Redial Interval setting.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Dialing Settings

3.

Touch the Redial On Busy text box to display the keypad.

4.

Enter a value (0-9, default is 3) and then touch the OK button.

5.

Touch the Save button.

ENWW

Set fax settings

199

Set redial-on-no-answer

The redial-on-no-answer setting selects the number of times the fax accessory redials if the number dialed does not answer. The number of retries is either 0 to 1 (used in the U.S.) or 0 to 2, depending on the country/region setting. The interval between retries is set by the redial interval setting.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Dialing Settings

3.

Touch the Redial On No Answer text box to display the keypad.

4.

Enter a value (0-2, default is 0) and then touch the OK button.

5.

Touch the Save button.

Set the dial tone detection

The detect dial tone setting determines whether the fax checks for a dial tone before sending a fax.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Dialing Settings

3.

Touch the Detect Dial Tone setting; a checkmark appears next to the Detect Dial Tone setting when selected. The default setting is unchecked (disabled).

4.

Touch the Save button to enable dial tone detection.

Set a dialing prefix (if required)

The dialing prefix setting allows you to enter a prefix number (such as a "9" to access an outside line) when dialing. This prefix number is automatically added to all phone numbers when dialed.

200 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

NOTE:

You might need a pause between the prefix and the phone number. To insert a 2-second pause, enter a comma (,), pound sign (#), or a “P”. To add an extension number, use “X”.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Fax Dialing Settings

3.

Touch the Dialing Prefix text box to display the keypad.

4.

Type your dialing prefix number on the keypad, and then touch the OK button.

5.

Touch the Save button.

General fax send settings

Use the General Fax Send Settings menu to configure the following features:

Fax Number Confirmation

PC Fax Send

Fax Header

JBIG Compression

Error Correction Mode

Activate Fax Number Confirmation

When fax number confirmation is enabled, the fax number must be entered twice to ensure that it was entered correctly. The default setting for this feature is Disabled .

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

General Fax Send Settings

3.

Touch the Fax Number Confirmation box to enable fax number confirmation.

4.

Touch the Save button.

ENWW

Set fax settings

201

Enable PC fax send

Use the PC fax send feature to send faxes from a PC. This feature is enabled by default. If this feature is disabled, use the following steps to enable:

NOTE:

The PC fax send driver must be installed on the computer from where the faxes will be sent.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

General Fax Send Settings

3.

Touch the PC Fax Send box.

4.

Touch the Save button.

Fax header

Use the fax header feature to control whether the header is appended to the top, and content is shifted down, or if the header is overlaid on top of the fax image.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

General Fax Send Settings

3.

Touch the Prepend (default) or Overlay option in the Fax Header section to orientate the fax header.

4.

Touch the Save button.

Set the JBIG compression mode

Enabling JBIG compression can reduce phone-call charges by reducing fax transmission time and is, therefore, the preferred setting. However, JBIG might cause compatibility problems when communicating with some older fax machines, in which case you might need to disable it.

NOTE:

JBIG compression only works when both the sending and receiving machines have JBIG compression.

202 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

To enable or disable JBIG compression, perform the following steps.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

General Fax Send Settings

3.

Touch the JBIG Compression feature (default) to enable JBIG compression.

4.

Touch the Save button.

Set the error correction mode

Normally, the fax accessory monitors the signals on the telephone line while it is sending or receiving a fax. If the fax accessory detects an error during the transmission and the error correction setting is on, the fax accessory can request that the error portion of the fax be sent again.

Error correction mode is enabled by default. You should turn off error correction only if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax and if you are willing to accept the errors in the transmission and a probable quality reduction in the image. Turning off the setting might be useful when you are trying to send a fax overseas or receive one from overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone connection.

NOTE:

Some VOIP providers may suggest turning error correction mode off. However, this is not usually necessary.

If error correction mode is disabled, follow these steps to enable:

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

General Fax Send Settings

3.

Touch the Error Correction Mode check box to enable error correction mode if it is disabled

(unchecked).

4.

Touch the Save button.

Set billing codes

The billing-code setting, when enabled, prompts the user to enter a number when sending a fax. This number is placed in the billing-code report. To view the billing-code report, either print the report or query it by using an application.

ENWW

Set fax settings

203

Billing codes are disabled by default. Follow these steps to enable billing codes:

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

Billing Codes

3.

Touch the Enable Billing Codes feature to enable billing codes.

NOTE:

To disable billing codes, deselect the Enable Billing Codes feature, touch the Save button, and then skip the remaining steps.

To allow users to edit billing codes, touch the Allow users to edit billing codes feature.

4.

Touch the Default Billing Code text box to open the keyboard.

5.

Enter the billing code and then touch the OK button.

6.

Touch the Minimum Length text box to open the keypad.

7.

Type the minimum number of digits you want in the billing code, and then touch the OK button.

8.

Touch the Save button.

Default job options

The following default job options are available for configuration:

Image Preview

Resolution

Original Sides

Notification

Content Orientation

Original Size

Image Adjustment

Optimize Text/Picture

Job Build

Blank Page Suppression

NOTE:

Default job option settings are shared across all fax methods; analog, LAN, and internet fax.

204 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

Image preview

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Image Preview

3.

The following option is available:

Disable preview

4.

Touch the Save button.

Set the outgoing fax resolution

The outgoing fax resolution setting determines the maximum resolution supported by the receiving fax.

The fax accessory uses the highest possible resolution (as limited by this setting) and the maximum resolution of the receiving fax.

NOTE:

Faxes wider than 21.25 cm (8.5 in) are automatically sent by using standard or fine resolution, to reduce phone time.

NOTE:

The default resolution setting is a lower dpi than previous product model default resolution settings. For example, previous product models had a default resolution of Fine (200 x 200 dpi).

NOTE:

The higher the resolution, the longer the transmission time required.

NOTE:

LAN fax settings resolution settings vary by vendor and may differ from the settings listed below.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Resolution

3.

Touch one of the following resolution settings:

Standard (100 x 200dpi) (default)

Fine (200 x 200dpi)

Superfine (300 x 300dpi)

4.

Touch the Save button.

ENWW

Set fax settings

205

Original sides

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Original Sides

3.

Touch one of the following options:

1-sided (default)

2-sided

4.

Touch the Orientation button to set the page orientation.

5.

Touch the Save button.

Notification

Notification selects when and how you are notified of the status of an outgoing fax. This setting applies to the current fax only. To change the setting permanently, change the default setting.

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Fax menu.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Notification

3.

Touch one of the following notification settings:

Do not notify (default)

Notify when job completes

Notify only if job fails

4.

Touch the Print option to receive a printed notification, or touch the E-mail option to receive an email notification.

5.

If you selected the Print option, touch the Save button to complete the notification setup.

-or-

206 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

If you selected the E-mail option, use the keyboard to type an e-mail address. Then touch the OK button to complete the notification setup.

6.

Touch the Include Thumbnail check box to include a thumbnail image with notifications.

Content orientation

Use the content orientation feature to set how the fax content is oriented on the page. For 1-sided pages, choose Portrait (short-edge on top, default setting) or Landscape (long-edge on top). For 2-sided pages, choose Book-style (short-edge on top) or Flip-style (long-edge on top).

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Content Orientation

3.

Touch Portrait (default) or Landscape for 1-sided pages.

4.

Touch Book-style or Flip-style for 2-sided pages.

5.

Touch the Save button.

Original size

Use the original size feature to match your fax content to the size of the original document.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Original Size

3.

Touch one of the following options:

Automatically detect (default)

Letter (8.5x11)

Mixed Letter/Legal

Legal (8.5 x 14)

Executive (7.25 x 10.5)

Statement (8.5 x 5.5)

ENWW

Set fax settings

207

Legal (8.5 x 13)

A4 (210x297 mm)

A5 (148x210 mm)

B5 (257x182 mm)

16k (197x273 mm)

DPostcard JIS (148x200 mm)

4.

Touch the Save button.

Image adjustment

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Image Adjustment

3.

Touch the Lighter or Darker buttons to adjust the Darkness setting.

4.

Touch the Less or More buttons to adjust the Contrast , Background Cleanup , or Sharpness settings.

5.

Touch the Save button.

NOTE:

Touch the Default button to reset the sharpness setting to the factory setting.

Optimize text/picture

Use the optimize text/picture feature to produce fax output that best matches the original. Sending graphics and photos in text mode results in lower quality images.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Optimize Text/Picture

208 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

3.

Touch one of the following options:

Manually adjust (default)

Text

Printed picture

Photograph

4.

Touch the Save button.

Job build

Use the job build feature to combine multiple originals into a single fax job.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Job Build

3.

Touch one of the following options:

Job Build off (default)

Job Build on

4.

Touch the Save button.

Blank page suppression

Use the Blank page suppression feature to prevent blank pages in a fax from being printed.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Default Job Options

Blank Page Suppression

ENWW

Set fax settings

209

3.

Touch one of the following options:

Disabled (default)

Enabled

4.

Touch the Save button.

Receive fax settings

Fax receive setup

Set the ringer volume

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Fax Receive Setup

3.

Touch the Ringer Volume drop down menu and then select one of the following ringer volume settings:

Off

Low (default)

High

4.

Touch the Save button to save the ringer volume setting.

Set rings-to-answer

The rings-to-answer setting determines the number of times the phone rings before the call is answered by the fax accessory.

NOTE:

The default setting range for rings-to-answer is country/region-specific. The range of possible rings-to-answer is limited by country/region.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Fax Receive Setup

210 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

3.

Touch the Rings To Answer drop-down menu and then touch the number of rings (1-5, the default is 1).

4.

Touch the Save button.

Set fax receive speed

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Fax Receive Setup

3.

Touch one of the following options from the Fax Receive Speed drop down menu:

Fast (default) — v.34/max 33,600 bps

Medium — v.17/max 14,600 bps

Slow — v.29/max 9600 bps

4.

Touch the Save button.

Set ring interval

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Fax Receive Setup

3.

Touch the box beneath the Ring Interval heading to open the keypad.

4.

Enter a value for the ring interval on the keypad, and then touch the OK button. The default setting for ring interval is 600.

5.

Touch the Save button.

ENWW

Set fax settings

211

Set ring frequency

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Fax Receive Setup

3.

Touch the box beneath the Ring Frequency heading to open the keypad.

4.

Enter a value for the ring frequency on the keypad, and then touch the OK button. The default setting for ring frequency is 68 hz.

5.

Touch the Save button.

Enable or disable the fax printing schedule

NOTE:

Before enabling a fax-printing schedule, a schedule must be created.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Fax Printing Schedule

3.

Touch the Use Fax Printing Schedule option.

4.

Touch the Schedule button.

5.

Touch Fax Printing Mode .

6.

Touch the green plus sign to open the Schedule a Weekly Fax Event screen.

7.

Select an option under the Event Type heading:

Print incoming faxes

Store incoming faxes

8.

Touch the Time fields to open the keypad and then enter the hour and minute values when incoming faxes will be printed or stored.

9.

Touch the Event Days buttons for the days to apply the fax printing schedule.

10.

Touch the OK button.

11.

Touch the Save button to save the fax printing schedule.

12.

Touch the Save button to enable fax printing schedule.

212 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

NOTE:

Only one fax printing schedule can be applied per day.

Block incoming faxes

Use the fax block list setting to create a list of blocked phone numbers. When a fax is received from a blocked phone number, the fax is not printed and is immediately deleted from memory.

Create a blocked-fax list

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Blocked Fax Numbers

3.

Touch the Fax Number to Block text box to display the keyboard.

4.

Type a number and then touch the OK button.

5.

Touch the green arrow to move the number to the Blocked Fax Numbers list.

NOTE:

To add additional blocked fax numbers, repeat steps 3 through 5.

6.

Touch the Save button to save the blocked fax numbers list.

Delete numbers from the blocked-fax list

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Blocked Fax Numbers

3.

Touch the number to be deleted from the Blocked Fax Numbers list, touch the Delete button, and then touch the Save button.

4.

Touch the OK button to confirm the deletion of the number.

5.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to delete more numbers from the Blocked Fax Numbers list, or touch the

Delete All button, and then touch the Save button, to delete all numbers from the Blocked Fax

Numbers list at once.

ENWW

Set fax settings

213

Initiate polling receive

Some fax machines can hold a fax until another fax machine requests that the fax be sent. When a product polls another fax machine that is holding a fax and requests that the held fax be sent to the product, this is known as polling receive.

1.

On the control panel, touch the Fax icon to display the Fax screen.

2.

Touch More Options to display the options screen.

3.

Scroll to page 3.

4.

Touch Fax Polling to display the Fax Polling screen.

5.

Touch the text box to display the keyboard.

6.

Using the keypad, type a polling receive number, and then touch Start .

7.

The number entered is dialed. If a stored fax is being held at the fax machine dialed, that fax is transmitted to the product and printed. If no fax is held, a No Fax is Available message will be displayed. If the fax machine does not support the polling feature, a Poll Invalid error message will be shown.

Default job options

The following default job options are available for configuration:

Notification

Stamp Received Faxes

Fit to Page

Paper Selection

Output Bin

Sides

NOTE:

Default job option settings are shared across all fax methods; analog, LAN, and internet fax.

Notification

This setting controls when the fax call report is printed for incoming faxes.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Default Job Options

Notification

214 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

3.

Touch one of the following notification settings:

Do not notify (default)

Notify when job completes

Notify only if job fails

4.

Touch the Print option to receive a printed notification, or touch the E-mail option to receive an email notification.

5.

If you selected the Print option, touch the Save button to complete the notification setup.

-or-

If you selected the E-mail option, use the keyboard to type an e-mail address. Then touch the Save button to complete the notification setup.

6.

Touch the Include Thumbnail check box to include a thumbnail image with notifications.

Stamp received faxes (incoming faxes)

The stamp received faxes setting enables or disables stamping incoming faxes. The stamp prints the date, time, phone number, and page number on each incoming page.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Default Job Options

Stamp Received Faxes

3.

Touch the Disabled option (default) to disable the stamp, or touch the Enabled option to enable the stamp.

4.

Touch the Save button.

Set fit-to-page

When selecting a page size to print a fax, the product determines the closest page size that matches the intended size from sizes available in the product. If the fit-to-page setting is enabled and the received image is larger than that page size, the product attempts to scale the image to fit the page. If this setting is disabled, an incoming image larger than the page splits across pages.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

ENWW

Set fax settings

215

Default Job Options

Fit to Page

3.

Touch the Enabled option (default) to enable fit-to-page, or touch the Disabled option to disable fitto-page.

4.

Touch the Save button.

Set the paper selection

Use the paper selection feature to specify which tray the paper for the fax is loaded from.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Default Job Options

Paper Selection

3.

Touch one of the following options:

Automatic (default)

Tray 1

Tray 2

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

4.

Touch the Save button.

Set the output bin

Use the output bin feature to set which output bin to use for outputting the fax.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Default Job Options

Output Bin

216 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

3.

Touch the bin to use for your received faxes.

4.

Touch the Save button.

Set the sides

Use the sides feature to specify 1-side or 2-sided output for faxes.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Default Job Options

Sides

3.

Touch one of the following options:

1-sided (default)

2-sided

4.

Touch the Save button.

Set the paper tray

The paper tray setting selects the product paper tray to pull paper from for printing faxes.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Receive Settings

Default Job Options

Paper Selection

3.

Touch the name of the tray to use for received faxes.

4.

Touch the Save button to save the paper tray selection value.

ENWW

Set fax settings

217

Enable fax forwarding

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Archive and Forwarding

3.

Touch the Enable Fax Forwarding box.

4.

Select one of the following choices from the Type of Fax Job to Forward drop down menu:

Send and receive

Send only

Receive only (default)

5.

Touch the Fax Forwarding Number text box to open the keypad.

6.

Type the number where faxes will be forwarded, and then touch the OK button.

7.

Touch the Save button.

218 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

Use fax

Fax feature screen

The Fax feature screen is used to send faxes. To access this screen, press the Fax icon displayed on the control panel Home screen.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

17

16

10

11

12

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

14

15

16

17

1

4

5

2

3

15 14 13

Home Key — touch to return to main screen

Send Fax — touch to send fax to recipients

Backspace/Delete Number

Enter Number into Recipient List

Status Message Bar

Access fax address book

Speed Dial Search by Number

Image Preview

Help — touch to display help selections

Speed Dial — Edit Key

Speed Dial — Search by Name

Speed Dial List (scroll to display other entries)

More Options — touch to view or set other fax sending options.

Press for Details of Selected Recipient

Press to Delete Selected Recipient from List

Fax Recipients

Fax Number — touch for keyboard or enter from control panel keypad

1

ENWW

Use fax

219

1

When the Fax Number is touched, a pop up is displayed which includes the PIN button for adding special character brackets ([ ]) to hide a PIN, and a Pause button to insert a comma for a two second pause.

NOTE:

The PIN is for calling card numbers, not for the security of faxed documents.

Status message bar

While sending and receiving faxes, status information will display in the status bar located at the top of some touch screens. This status includes such information as: Ready, Receiving call, Page sent, and others.

Send a fax

To send a fax, you can use one of three basic methods to enter numbers:

Enter numbers manually.

Enter numbers using speed dial.

Enter numbers using the fax address book.

NOTE:

For online information about sending a fax, touch ?

on the screen to access the help menu, and then touch the Fax menu under the list of help topics.

Allowable characters in fax numbers

Digits (0-9)

#

*

,

● spaces

[]

()

220 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

+

X

P

When entering a phone number from the numeric keypad, include any pauses or other numbers, such as area codes, access codes for numbers outside a PBX system (usually a 9 or 0), or a long-distance prefix. A two second pause may be included by typing a comma (,). If the fax prefix setting has been set to automatically include the dialing prefix, you will not need to enter it.

NOTE:

When a fax is sent, it is first scanned and stored into memory. After the entire document is stored, it is sent and then deleted from memory. Faxes that fail to send, because the number was busy or did not answer, are deleted from memory. If the Redial On Busy or Redial On No Answer features are set, the fax will not be deleted until all retries fail or the fax is sent successfully.

Send a fax by entering numbers manually

1.

Place the document in the automatic document feeder (ADF) or on the scanner glass.

2.

From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.

You may be prompted to type a user name and password.

3.

Touch the More Options button. Verify that the settings match those of your original. When all settings are completed, touch the up arrow to scroll to the main Fax screen.

ENWW

Use fax

221

4.

Touch the Fax Number box to open the keypad.

5.

Using the keypad, enter a phone number and then touch the OK button.

6.

Touch the Start icon to send the fax. You can either touch the Start icon on the touch screen or press the green Start button on the control panel.

Send a fax using speed dial

NOTE:

Prior to sending a fax using speed dial, you must create a speed dial.

1.

Place the document in the document feeder or on the scanner glass.

2.

From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.

3.

Touch a Speed Dial number for the speed dial name you wish to use and then touch the OK button. The speed dial name will appear in the Fax Number section of the Fax screen.

4.

Touch the Start button to send the fax. You can either touch the Start button on the touch screen or press the green Start button on the control panel.

Search a speed-dial list by name

Use this feature to search an existing speed dial by name.

NOTE:

If you do not know the unique name of the speed dial, type a letter to select any portion of the list. For example, to view speed-dial names that begin with the letter N, type the letter N. If no matching entries exist, a message appears before the search shows the entry that is closest to the letter N.

222 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.

2.

Touch the Speed Dial Search button. This button looks like a magnifying glass and is located to the right of the Speed Dial button.

3.

Type the first letters of the speed dial name to search for. As matches are found, the list at the top of the search screen is populated. If necessary, scroll to see all the entries, or type more letters to narrow the search.

4.

Select the appropriate name from the list and touch the OK button. The speed-dial list on the main fax screen shows the selected entry within the list of numbers.

5.

Touch a speed dial number to add it to the recipients list.

6.

Select or search for additional names as needed.

Enable speed dial matching

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Fax Send Settings

Fax Send Setup

General Fax Send Settings

3.

Touch the Fax Number Speed Dial Matching menu, and then touch the Enable option.

4.

Touch the Save button.

ENWW

Use fax

223

Send a fax by using fax address book numbers

The fax address book feature allows you to store fax numbers on the product.

Your Microsoft® Exchange contact list might also be enabled on the product to appear in the fax address book.

1.

On the control panel, touch the Fax icon to display the Fax screen.

2.

Touch the Address Book icon to display the Address Book screen.

3.

Select a fax address book source from the drop-down menu.

4.

Touch the names to highlight them, and then touch the right arrow icon to move the highlighted names to the Fax Recipients section.

5.

Touch the OK button to return to the Fax screen.

6.

Touch the Start button to send the fax. You can either touch the Start button on the touch screen or press the green Start button on the control panel.

Fax address book search

Use the fax address book search feature to complete a name search of the address book.

1.

Touch the Fax icon on the Home screen.

2.

Touch the fax address book icon (located to the right of the fax recipients box).

3.

Select the All Contacts or Local Contacts choice in the drop down menu at the top of the fax address book screen.

4.

Touch the Search icon (magnifying glass) next to the drop down menu.

5.

On the keyboard, type the first letter or letters of the name; matching recipients appear as letters are typed. Type more letters to further refine the search. Select from the name(s) found at the top of the screen, and then touch OK . The screen returns to the fax address book.

6.

Touch the right arrow to enter the selected name into the Fax Recipients list.

7.

Touch the OK button to return to the Send Fax job screen.

NOTE:

To import or export the local fax address book to the EWS, refer to the EWS documentation.

Cancel a fax

Cancel the current fax transmission

Touch the Cancel Job button on the fax Status screen.

-or-

On the control panel, touch the Stop button.

Touch the OK button when the message Job has been aborted. displays.

224 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

Touch the OK button to finish canceling the fax job and return to the Fax screen.

Cancel pending faxes

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Job Status button.

2.

Touch the fax job to cancel on the Job Status screen.

3.

Touch the Cancel Job button.

4.

Touch the Yes button on the screen with the message Are you sure you want to cancel this

job? displays.

NOTE:

The cancel operation may require up to 30 seconds to complete.

Receive faxes

When the fax accessory receives incoming faxes, it stores them in memory before printing. After the entire fax is stored, it is printed and then deleted from memory. Faxes print when received unless

Schedule Printing of Faxes is enabled. If Schedule Printing of Faxes is enabled, all incoming faxes are stored in memory and not printed. When Schedule Printing of Faxes is disabled, all stored faxes print.

You can change the fax-receive default settings to modify the way a fax is received. These settings include the following options:

Selecting the number of rings-to-answer

Printing date, time, and page number on faxes (stamp)

Selecting input paper tray and destination bin

Forwarding faxes to another number

Blocking faxes from certain numbers

Schedule the printing of faxes (memory lock)

Notification settings

Create or delete speed dial lists

Speed dial allows you to assign a speed dial name to a single number or a group of numbers and then send a fax to that number or numbers by selecting the speed dial name.

ENWW

Use fax

225

Create a speed dial list

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the

Fax button.

2.

Touch the Speed Dials button to display the

Speed Dial screen.

3.

Touch a Speed Dial Number .

4.

Touch the Speed Dial Name box to display the keyboard.

5.

Type a name for the speed dial.

6.

Touch the down arrow on the Speed Dial

Name box to open the drop down menu.

7.

Touch the Fax Number option.

226 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

8.

Type a fax number for the Speed Dial Name .

NOTE:

To enter additional fax numbers for a speed dial name, touch the screen to the right of the last digit of the previously entered fax number. When the cursor appears, touch the enter key to move the cursor to the next line. Repeat this step to enter all the numbers for the speed dial name.

9.

Touch the OK button. The name and fax number (or numbers) will appear next to the

Speed Dial Number .

10.

When finished, press the OK button to return to the Fax screen

Delete a speed dial list

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the

Fax button.

2.

Touch the Speed Dials button to display the

Speed Dial screen.

ENWW

Use fax

227

3.

Touch a Speed Dials number of the list to be deleted.

4.

Touch the Delete button.

5.

Touch the Yes button to confirm the deletion of the speed dial list and to return to the Fax screen.

Delete a single number from the speed dial list

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the

Fax button.

2.

Touch the Speed Dials button to display the

Speed Dial screen.

3.

Touch the Speed Dial number of the list to open the keyboard.

228 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

4.

Touch the down arrow on the Speed Dial

Name box to open the drop down menu and then touch the Fax Numbers option.

5.

Scroll through the list of fax numbers and touch the screen to the right of last digit of the fax number to be deleted. Use the backspace key to delete the fax number.

6.

Touch the OK button to return to the Speed

Dials screen.

7.

Touch the OK button to return to the Fax screen.

Add a number to an existing speed dial list

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the

Fax button.

2.

Touch the Speed Dials button to display the

Speed Dial screen.

ENWW

Use fax

229

3.

Touch the Speed Dial number of the list to be edited.

4.

Touch the down arrow on the Speed Dial

Name box to open the drop down menu.

5.

Touch the Fax Numbers item.

6.

To add a fax number for a speed dial name, touch the screen to the right of the last digit of the last fax number in the list. When the cursor appears, touch the enter key to move the cursor to the next line and then type the fax number.

7.

Touch the OK button to return to the Speed

Dials screen.

8.

Touch the OK button to return to the Fax screen.

230 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

Voice calls and retries

Fax call report

A fax call report is printed when the notification feature has been enabled in the Default Job Options or

More Options menu.

When all fax attempts have been exhausted, a fax call report will be printed for a fax send. It shows the fax job log ID. The result of the final attempt is printed on the fax call report.

A fax call report does not print for voice calls.

NOTE:

A fax call report only generates Job numbers for final attempts. If one of these reports is printed manually from the menu and the last call was neither the final attempt nor a voice call, the job number will be zero.

Fax activity log

Voice calls are not included in the fax activity log by default. Only the final attempt, after all redials are used or the fax is a success, is listed in the fax activity log.

T.30 report

Voice calls do not cause a T.30 report to print. All retry attempts cause a T.30 report to print.

Print stored faxes

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Open from Device Memory button.

2.

Touch the Stored Faxes menu.

3.

In the Stored Faxes list, touch the fax that you want to print.

4.

Touch the Start icon to print the fax. You can either touch the Start icon on the touch screen or press the green Start button on the control panel.

Scheduling fax printing (memory lock)

Use the fax scheduling feature to specify when faxes print. The following fax printing modes can be selected:

Store all received faxes

Print all received faxes

Use Fax Printing Schedule

If the Store all received faxes feature is selected, then all incoming faxes will be stored in memory and not printed. It is possible to access fax jobs stored in memory through the Open from Device Memory menu. Using this menu, you can print or delete print jobs while they are stored in memory. For additional information about this feature, see the Retrieve Job menu description in the product user guide.

ENWW

Use fax

231

NOTE:

Retrieved stored faxes can be accessed by entering the Fax Printing menu and changing to the Print all received faxes mode.

If the Print all received faxes mode is selected, then all incoming faxes will be printed. Any faxes that are currently stored in memory will also be printed.

If the Use Fax Printing Schedule mode is selected, then faxes will be only printed per the fax printing schedule. The fax printing schedule can be set to lockout an entire day (24 hours) or lockout a time period during the day. Only one lockout period can be set, but it can be applied to any number of days. The lockout period is setup under the Fax Printing Schedule menu.

Adding only one type of event into the schedule would make the product behave as Store All

Received Faxes or Print All Received Faxes based on the type of single event added i.e. Single

Store Event would cause device to Store All Received Faxes and Single Print Event would cause

Print All Received Faxes.

NOTE:

When the lockout time ends, any faxes that were received and stored during the lockout period are printed automatically.

Use fax over VoIP networks

VoIP technology converts the analog phone signal into digital bits. These are then assembled into packets which travel on the Internet. The packets are converted and transmitted back to analog signals at or near the destination.

The transmission of the information on the Internet is done digitally instead of analog. Therefore, there are different constraints on the fax transmission that may require different fax settings than the analog

Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). Fax is very dependent upon timing and signal quality, so a fax transmission is more sensitive to a VoIP environment.

The following are suggested changes in settings for the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory

500 when it is connected to a VoIP service:

Start off with the fax set in V.34 (Fast) mode and with Error Correction Mode (ECM) turned on.

The V.34 protocol handles any changes in transmission speed needed to accommodate VoIP networks.

If numerous errors or retries occur with the unit set to V.34, set V.34 Off and set speed to Medium

(14,400 bps).

If errors and retries persist, set a lower fax speed as some VoIP systems cannot handle the higher signal rates associated with fax. Set the Maximum Baud Rate to 9,600 bps (Slow).

In rare cases, if errors persist, turn off ECM on the product. The image quality might decrease.

Ensure that the image quality is acceptable with ECM off before using this setting.

If the preceding setting changes have not improved the VoIP fax reliability, contact your VoIP provider for help.

232 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

Solve fax problems

Is your fax set up correctly?

Use the following checklist to help identify the cause of any fax related problems you are encountering:

Are you using the phone cord supplied with the fax accessory? This fax accessory has been tested with the supplied phone cord to meet RJ11 and functional specifications. Do not substitute another phone cord; the analog-fax accessory requires an analog phone cord. It also requires an analog phone connection.

Is the fax/phone line connector seated in the socket on the fax accessory? Make sure that the phone jack is well seated in the socket. The connector should be inserted into the socket until it "clicks."

Is the phone wall jack working properly? Verify that a dial tone exists by attaching a phone to the wall jack. Can you hear a dial tone, and can you make a phone call?

What type of phone line are you using?

Dedicated line: A standard fax/phone number assigned to receive or send faxes.

NOTE:

The phone line should be for product fax use only and not shared with other types of telephone devices. Examples include alarm systems that use the phone line for notifications to a monitoring companies.

PBX system: A business-environment phone system. Standard home phones and the fax accessory use an analog phone signal. Some PBX systems are digital and might not be compatible with the fax accessory. You need to have access to a standard analog phone line to be able to send and receive faxes.

Roll-over lines: A phone system feature where a new call "rolls over" to the next available line when the first incoming line is busy. Try attaching the fax accessory to the first incoming phone line. The fax accessory will answer the phone after it rings the number of times set in the rings-toanswer setting.

NOTE:

Roll-over lines can cause problems with the fax accessory's ability to receive faxes. Using rollover lines with this product is not recommended.

Are you using a surge-protection device?

A surge-protection device can be used between the wall jack and the fax accessory to protect the fax accessory against electrical power passed through the phone lines. These devices can cause some fax communication problems by degrading the quality of the phone signal. If you are having problems sending or receiving faxes and are using one of these devices, connect the fax accessory directly to the phone jack on the wall to determine whether the problem is with the surge-protection device.

ENWW

Solve fax problems

233

Are you using a phone company voice-messaging service or an answering machine?

If the rings-to-answer setting for the messaging service is lower than the rings-to-answer setting for the fax accessory, the messaging service answers the call, and the fax accessory is not able to receive faxes. If the rings-to-answer setting for the fax accessory is lower than that of the messaging service, the fax accessory answers all calls, and no calls are routed to the messaging service.

Does your phone line have a call-waiting feature?

If the fax telephone line has an activated call-waiting feature, a call-waiting notice can interrupt a fax call in progress, which causes a communication error. Ensure that a call-waiting feature is not active on the fax telephone line.

Check fax accessory status

If the analog-fax accessory does not appear to be functioning, print a Configuration Page report to check the status.

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Reports

Configuration/Status Pages

Configuration Page

3.

Touch the Print button to print the report, or touch the View button to view the report on the screen.

The report consists of several pages.

NOTE:

The product IP address or host name is listed on the Jetdirect Page.

On the Fax Accessory Page of the Configuration Page, under the Hardware Information heading, check the Modem Status. The following table identifies the status conditions and possible solutions.

Operational / Enabled

1

Operational / Disabled

1

Non-Operational / Enabled/Disabled

1

The analog-fax accessory is installed and ready.

The fax accessory is installed and operational, however,

HP Digital Sending utility has either disabled the product fax feature or has enabled LAN fax. When LAN fax is enabled, the analog-fax feature is disabled. Only one fax feature, either

LAN fax or analog fax, can be enabled at a time.

A firmware failure has been identified. The firmware should be updated.

1

Damaged / Enabled/Disabled

1

Fax accessory has failed; reseat the fax accessory card and check for bent pins. If the status is still DAMAGED, replace the analog-fax accessory card.

ENABLED indicates that the analog fax accessory is enabled, turned on; DISABLED indicates that LAN fax is enabled (analog fax is turned off).

234 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

Fax feature is not operating

The fax accessory is installed but the icon does not appear on the product main screen.

Cause Solution

HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration utility has disabled the analog-fax feature.

The accessory is not operating correctly.

Faulty formatter board.

Use the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration utility to enable the analog-fax feature.

Check the fax accessory status. If the status is

NON-OPERATIONAL, new firmware might need to be installed.

If the status is DAMAGED and you just installed the card, try reseating the card and check for bent pins.

If the status is DAMAGED and the card is installed correctly, the card might need to be replaced.

Contact your HP service representative for service.

The product is not displaying the fax menus.

Cause

LAN fax is enabled.

Solution

This is normal operation. When the HP Digital Sending

Software enables LAN fax, the analog fax is disabled and the fax menu, which is used for the analog fax only, does not open.

General fax problems

Problem

Fax failed to send.

An "Out of Memory" status message appears on the status message bar.

Print quality of a photo is poor or prints as a gray box.

Pressed the Cancel button on the product keyboard to cancel a fax transmission and the fax was still sent.

No fax address book button appears.

Cause

JBIG is enabled and receiving fax does not have JBIG capability.

The product storage disk is full.

Solution

Set JBIG off.

Wrong Page Content mode setting.

Delete some files from the disk, see the product user guide for information about managing the disk.

Try setting the Optimize Text/Picture option to Photograph .

Cancel faxes using the fax menu.

Cancellation takes place after making a selection in the cancellation menu

(displayed after pressing red Stop button) and acknowledging with OK .

The fax address book feature has not been enabled.

Use the HP MFP Digital Sending

Software Configuration utility to enable the fax address book feature.

ENWW

Solve fax problems

235

Problem

Not able to locate the Fax settings in

HP Web Jetadmin.

The header is being appended to the top of the page when I have overlay enabled.

Have a mix of names and numbers in the recipients box.

My one page fax prints as two pages.

Document stops feeding in the middle of faxing.

The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too low.

Cause Solution

Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin are located under the device's status page drop-down menu.

The fax will append the overlay header to the top of a page when overlay is set, when the fax has been forwarded.

This is normal for both names and numbers to appear, depending on where they are from, the fax address book lists names, and all other databases list numbers.

Select Digital Sending and Fax from the drop-down menu.

This is normal operation.

Normal, no action required.

The fax header is being appended to the top of the fax, pushing text to a second page.

If you want your one page fax to print on one page, set the overlay header to overlay mode or adjust the Fit to page setting.

There might be a jam in the ADF.

The volume setting needs to be adjusted.

If there is a jam, see the product user guide for instructions on clearing jams.

Problems with receiving faxes

Incoming fax calls are not being answered by the fax accessory (no fax detected).

Cause Solution

The rings-to-answer setting might not be set correctly.

The phone cord might not be connected properly, or the phone cord is not working.

The phone line might not be working.

A voice-messaging service might be interfering with the fax accessory's ability to answer calls.

Check the rings-to-answer setting.

Check the installation. Make sure you are using the phone cord that came with the fax accessory.

Disconnect the fax accessory from the phone jack, and connect a phone. Try to make a phone call to ensure the phone line is working.

Do one of the following:

Discontinue the messaging service.

Get a phone line dedicated to fax calls.

Decrease the rings-to-answer for the fax accessory to a number less than the rings-to-answer for the voice mail.

Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly.

Cause Solution

You might be sending or receiving a very complex fax, such as one with many graphics.

Complex faxes take longer to be sent or received.

236 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly.

Cause Solution

The receiving fax machine might have a slow modem speed.

The fax accessory only sends the fax at the fastest modem speed the receiving fax machine can use.

The resolution at which the fax was sent or is being received is very high. A higher resolution typically results in better quality, but also requires a longer transmission time.

If there is a poor phone-line connection, the fax accessory and the receiving fax machine slow down the transmission to adjust for errors.

If you are receiving the fax, call and ask the sender to decrease the resolution and resend the fax. If you are sending, decrease the resolution and change the Optimize

Text/Picture option.

Cancel and resend the fax. Have the phone company check the phone line.

Faxes are not printing on the product.

Cause Solution

There is no media in the media input tray.

Schedule Printing of Faxes is set.

The product is either low on toner or has run out of toner.

Incoming call may be a voice call.

The incoming fax was interrupted.

Load media. Any faxes received while the input tray is empty are stored and will print after the tray has been refilled.

If Schedule Printing of Faxes is enabled, faxes will not print until it is disabled.

The product stops printing as soon as it is low on toner or runs out of toner. Any faxes received are stored in memory and print after the toner has been replaced. For other product printing problems, see the product user guide.

Incoming voice calls usually show up in the call report as a

Communication Error (17) As these are voice calls and not a fax error, no action is needed to be taken. Ensure that those calling you have a voice number that is different from the fax number.

Verify that the fax telephone line does not have an activated call-waiting feature. A call-waiting notice can interrupt a fax call in progress, which causes a communication error.

The Fax Printing Schedule feature is set to Always store faxes .

Change the Fax Printing Schedule setting to Always print faxes .

Problems with sending faxes

Problem

Faxes quit during sending.

Cause

The fax machine to which you are sending might be malfunctioning.

Your phone line might not be working.

Solution

Try sending to another fax machine.

Disconnect the fax accessory from the phone jack, and connect a phone. Try to make a phone call to ensure the phone line is working.

ENWW

Solve fax problems

237

Problem

The fax accessory is receiving faxes but is not sending them.

Outgoing fax calls keep dialing.

Faxes you send are not arriving at the receiving fax machine.

Cause Solution

Your phone line might be noisy or poor quality

A call-waiting feature might be active

Try using a lower baud rate to improve the reliability of transmission. See maximum baud rate setting.

Verify that the fax telephone line does not have an activated call-waiting feature. A call-waiting notice can interrupt a fax call in progress, which causes a communication error.

Disable the detect dial tone setting.

If the fax accessory is on a PBX system, the PBX system might be generating a dial tone the fax accessory cannot detect.

There might be a poor phone connection.

The fax machine to which you are sending might be malfunctioning.

Try again later.

Try sending to another fax machine.

Your phone line might not be working.

Disconnect the fax accessory from the phone jack, and connect a phone. Try to make a phone call to ensure the phone line is working.

The fax accessory automatically redials a fax number if the Redial on Busy option is set to on or if the Redial On No

Answer is set on.

This is normal operation. If you do not want the fax to retry, set Redial on Busy to 0 and set Redial On No Answer to 0.

The receiving fax machine might be turned off or might have an error condition, such as being out of paper.

A fax might be in memory because it is waiting to redial a busy number, or there are other jobs ahead of it waiting to be sent.

Call the recipient to make sure the fax machine is turned on and ready to receive faxes.

If a fax job is in memory for either of these reasons, an entry for the job appears in the fax log. Print the fax activity log, and check the Result column for jobs with a Pending designation.

Error codes

If a fax problem occurs which prevents or interrupts sending or receiving of a fax, an error code is generated that will help in determining the cause of the problem. Error codes show up in the fax activity log, the fax call report, and the T.30 protocol trace. Print one of these three reports to obtain the error code. A detailed description of the error codes and the appropriate action can be found at www.hp.com

by searching for HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500.

Fax error messages

When an analog fax is sent or received on an HP LaserJet product, any errors that occur during the fax process will be displayed on the product control panel and entered into the fax reports. Fax errors can occur for many reasons and often they are due to interruptions or noise on the telephone connection.

238 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

ENWW

Any error that takes place during the fax process regardless of where it originates will be displayed by the product.

If the fax process is interrupted or an error occurs during a fax transmission or reception, a two part status/error description is generated by the fax subsystem on the product. Normal or successful faxes also generate messages indicating success. The message information consists of a text description and a numeric code (a few messages don’t include numeric codes). Only the text part of the message will be displayed on the product control panel; however, both the text message and numeric code will be listed in the fax activity log, fax call report, and the fax T.30 trace (these fax reports can be printed out individually from the product control panel – under the Administration > Reports > Fax Reports and

Administration > Troubleshooting > Fax > Fax T.30 Trace menus). The numeric code is shown in parentheses after the text part of the message in the reports. For example, if a communication error occurred, the control panel display would show Fax Failed: Communication Error. The same error would be shown in the Result field in the Fax Activity Report as Communication Error (17).

For this example, the numeric code associated with this communication error is ‘17’.

The numeric code is generated by the fax modem. Usually a numeric code of (0) indicates a normal modem response. Some messages will always display a numeric code of (0), whereas other messages can have a range of numeric codes depending on the circumstances, and a few messages will have no numeric code. Usually a numeric code of (0) indicates an error was not associated with the fax modem, but occurred in another part of the fax subsystem or other product subsystem such as the printing subsystem. Non-zero error codes give further detail into the particular action or process that the modem is executing, and they don’t necessarily indicate that there is a problem with the modem.

In the tables that follow, the fax messages with the most common number codes are given with recommended corrective action. Several messages that are normal or indicate a normal event are also included in tables. For example, if a fax was not able to be sent to a busy number, a Fail Busy message will be shown. Nothing is wrong with the fax subsystem; the message indicates the fax was not completed due to a busy telephone number at the receiving end.

Persistent error messages with numeric codes different than those listed here require assistance of customer support. A more detailed listing of the last fax call can be printed out before contacting customer support to help identify the problem. The detailed fax listing is called a fax T.30 trace and can be printed for the last fax, or it can be set to print whenever a fax error occurs. To print or configure the fax T.30 trace, touch Administration , Troubleshooting , and then Fax T.30 Trace . You can then print the report for the last fax or configure when to print the T.30 trace.

Solve fax problems 239

Send-fax messages

Table 11-1 Send-fax messages

Message Error No.

Cancelled

Success

Fail Busy

No Answer

Compression Error

No Dial

Modem Fail

0 n/a

0

0

Any

0

Any

Communication Error

17 or 36

Communication Error

Any besides 17 or 36

Space Fail

Page Fail

Memory Error

Job Fail

0

0

0

Any

Description Action(s)

Fax was cancelled by user at control panel of product.

Fax sent successfully.

The receiving fax machine is busy.

The receiving fax machine is not answering the call.

None.

None.

The fax will be retried automatically (if configured); otherwise try resending fax later.

The receiving fax machine may be disconnected or turned off; contact the receiver to check the machine. Try resending.

Try resending fax.

Fax may be corrupted or not sent.

No dial tone is detected when sending the fax.

Unexpected or bad response from the internal fax modem to product.

Verify the phone line is active; set the sending fax to

"not" to detect a dial tone.

Try resending fax; if the error persists, contact service.

NOTE:

This does not necessarily indicate that the modem hardware is bad.

Lost telephone connection between sender and receiver.

May be due to voice calls.

Try resending the fax.

General communications issue where the fax transmission was interrupted or did not proceed as expected.

Unable to read or write the fax image file to disk; could be corrupt product disk or no space available on the product's disk.

Incompatible page width, or page had too many bad lines.

Try resending fax; if the error persists, contact service.

Try resending fax; if the error persists, contact service.

Try resending fax; if the error persists, contact service.

Out of RAM memory on product.

Fax failure; the fax job did not complete.

If error persists, may need to add RAM to product.

Try resending fax; if the error persists, contact service.

240 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

Table 11-1 Send-fax messages (continued)

Message Error No.

Power Failure

0

No Fax Detected

17 or 36

Description Action(s)

A power failure occurred during the fax transmission on the sending fax product.

Try resending the fax.

No fax machine was detected at receiving end. May be due to voice calls.

Verify fax number and have receiver verify fax machine is on and connected; then try resending fax.

ENWW

Solve fax problems

241

Receive-fax messages

242

Table 11-2 Receive-fax messages

Message Error No.

Success

Blocked

n/a n/a

Modem Fail

Any

Communication Error

17, 36

Communication Error

Any besides 17 or 36

Space Fail

Page Fail

Memory Error

Compression Error

Print Fail

Poll Invalid

0

0

0

0

0

Job Fail

Power Failure

No Fax Detected

Chapter 11 Fax

0

Any

0

17, 36

Description Action(s)

Fax received ok.

None.

Fax reception was blocked by receiving fax machine using blocked number feature.

None.

Have fax resent; if the error persists, contact service.

Unexpected or bad response from the internal modem to the product - example is trying to send a fax just as another fax is arriving.

Lost telephone connection or interruption between sender/ receiver.

General communications issue where the fax transmission was interrupted or did not proceed as expected.

Unable to read or write image file to disk; could be corrupt product disk or no space on disk.

Incompatible page width or page had too many bad lines.

Out of RAM memory on product.

Have the sender resend the fax (if the sending machine does not automatically retry).

Have fax resent; if the error persists, contact service.

Have fax resent; if the error persists, contact service.

Have fax resent; if the error persists, contact service.

If error persists, may need to add additional RAM memory to product.

Corrupted fax - the received image file cannot be decoded.

Corrupted fax - the received image file cannot be decoded.

The fax polling feature attempted to retrieve a fax from another machine but no fax was available.

Fax failure; this includes all non-specific failures.

A power failure occurred during the fax reception.

A voice call was made to the fax.

Have fax resent; enable ECM

(Error Correction Mode) if not already.

Have fax resent; enable ECM

(Error Correction Mode) if not already.

Contact the administrator of the fax machine being polled and verify a fax is available, and then retry.

Have fax resent; if the error persists, contact service.

Have the sender resend the fax.

None

ENWW

Fax reports

The following sections list the fax reports available on this product. These reports can be printed or viewed on the product control panel.

The following fax reports are available on this product:

Fax Activity Log

Billing Codes Report

Blocked Fax List

Speed Dial List

Fax Call Report

Use the following steps to print or view a fax report:

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Reports

Fax Reports

3.

Touch the log or report to print or view.

4.

Touch the Print or View button.

Fax activity log

The fax activity log includes the following information.

The fax header information configured on the product.

The job number of each fax job.

Date and time of all faxes received, sent, or failed to send.

The type of fax job; send or receive.

Identification (phone number, if available)

Duration (off-hook time)

Number of pages

Result (successfully sent, pending, or failed to send which includes error type and code)

The database stores the most recent 500 fax entries (older faxes are deleted from the log). The database fax entries include any fax session as an entry. For example, a fax session could be a sent fax, received fax, or firmware upgrades. Depending on the activity, there might be fewer than 500 entries in the report (unless you sent 500 faxes without receiving any faxes or other completing another activity).

ENWW

Solve fax problems

243

If you want to use the log for record keeping purposes, you should print the log periodically (at least every 500 faxes) and then clear it.

Billing code report

The billing code report is a list of the most recent 500 faxes that were successfully sent, listed by billing code. The following information is provided in this report.

Billing code number

Date and time of all faxes that were successfully sent

Identification number

Duration (off hook time)

Number of pages sent

Result (success)

The database stores the most recent 500 faxes (older faxes are deleted from the database). If you want to use the report for record keeping purposes, you should print the report periodically (at least every

500 faxes) and then clear it.

Blocked fax list report

The blocked fax list report contains the list of fax numbers that the product has been configured to not receive faxes from.

Speed dial list report

A speed dial list report lists the fax numbers assigned to speed dial names.

Fax call report

The fax call report is a brief report that indicates the status of the last fax that was sent or received.

Clear the fax activity log

To clear the fax activity log, complete the following steps.

1.

On the control panel, touch the Administration icon.

2.

Open the following menus:

Fax Settings

Clear fax activity log

3.

Touch the Clear button to clear the fax activity log.

244 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

Service settings

These items in the control-panel menus can help with troubleshooting if the corrective action taken under the Error Codes section is unsuccessful. They are intended to be used when an HP service representative is assisting you.

Settings in the Troubleshooting menu

Open the Administration menu, and then select the Troubleshooting menu.

Troubleshooting menu settings T.30 Trace: The T.30 trace is a printed report which produces a record of all the communications between the sending and receiving fax machines for the last Fax transmission or reception. The report has many technical details which are usually beyond the scope of most users. However the report contains detailed error codes and other information that might be useful in troubleshooting a particular problem related to sending or receiving a FAX. The report contents might be requested by an HP service representative when trying to determine the cause of a problem and will help to determine the appropriate action.

Transmit Signal Loss : This selection compensates for phone line signal loss. It is not recommended to modify this setting unless requested to do so by an HP service representative as it might render the fax inoperable.

V34 : This setting has two values (Normal and Off) that control the modem's baud rate. The Normal setting allows the modem to select (negotiate with the other modem) any of the supported baud rates up to 33,600 bps. The Off setting sets the baud rate to 14,400 bps. This setting remains set, until changed.

Speaker Mode : This service setting has two modes, Normal and Diagnostic. In

Normal mode, the modem speaker is turned on during dialing through the initial connection and then shuts off. For Diagnostic mode, the speaker is turned on and remains on for all fax communications until the setting is returned to Normal.

Settings in the Resets menu

Open the Administration menu, and then select the Resets menu.

Resets menu settings Restore Factory Telecom Settings or Restore Default Telecom Settings : This selection resets several menu changes back to their default settings. This includes the maximum baud rate, ring-burst off time, V.34, speaker mode, and transmit signal loss.

Firmware upgrades

The firmware on the fax accessory can be updated. Fax firmware updates occur as part of an overall product firmware update. See the product user guide for more information.

ENWW

Solve fax problems

245

246 Chapter 11 Fax ENWW

12 Manage and maintain

Print information pages

Use the HP Embedded Web Server

Use HP Web Jetadmin software

Product security features

Economy settings

Install external I/O devices

Clean the product

Product updates

ENWW 247

Print information pages

Information pages provide details about the product and its current configuration. Use the following procedure to print or view the information pages:

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the Reports menu.

3.

Select the name of the report you want to review, and then touch the Print button to print it or touch the View button to review the settings on the control-panel display.

NOTE:

Some pages do not have the View option.

First Level Second Level

Configuration/Status Pages Administration Menu Map

Current Settings Page

Configuration Page

Supplies Status

Fax Reports

Other Pages

Usage Page

File Directory Page

Fax Activity Log

Billing Codes Report

Blocked Fax List

Speed Dial List

Fax Call Report

PCL Font List

PS Font List

Description

Shows the entire structure of the Administration menu so you can identify how to navigate to any option.

Shows the product's current configurable settings.

Shows the product settings and installed accessories.

Shows the approximate remaining life for the supplies; reports statistics on total number of pages processed, serial number, page counts, and maintenance information.

HP provides approximations of the remaining life for the supplies as a customer convenience. The actual remaining supply levels might be different than the approximations provided, depending on the types of documents printed and other factors.

Shows a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the product; lists whether they were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color; and reports the page count.

Shows the file name and folder name for files that are stored in the product memory.

Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this product.

A list of billing codes that have been used for outgoing faxes.

This report shows how many sent faxes were billed to each code.

A list of phone numbers that are blocked from sending faxes to this product.

Shows the speed dials that have been set up for this product.

A detailed report of the last fax operation, either sent or received.

Prints the available PCL fonts.

Prints the available PS fonts.

248 Chapter 12 Manage and maintain ENWW

Use the HP Embedded Web Server

Use the HP Embedded Web Server to view product status, configure product network settings, and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the product control panel. The following are examples of what you can do using the HP Embedded Web Server:

NOTE:

When the product is directly connected to a computer, use the HP Easy Printer Care software to view the product status instead of the HP Embedded Web Server.

View product status information.

Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones.

View and change tray configurations.

View and change the product control-panel menu configuration.

View and print internal pages.

Receive notification of product and supplies events.

View and change network configuration.

To use the HP Embedded Web Server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later or

Netscape 6.2 or later for Windows, Mac OS, and Linux (Netscape only). Netscape Navigator 4.7 is required for HP-UX 10 and HP-UX 11. The HP Embedded Web Server works when the product is connected to an IP-based network. The HP Embedded Web Server does not support IPX-based product connections. You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the HP Embedded Web Server.

When the product is connected to the network, the HP Embedded Web Server is automatically available.

Open the HP Embedded Web Server by using a network connection

1.

Identify the product IP address or host name:

a. From the Home screen on the product control panel touch the Administration button.

b. Open the Reports menu.

c.

Open the Configuration Page menu, and touch the Print button.

d. Find the IP address or host name on the HP Jetdirect page.

2.

In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the product IP address or host name in the address/URL field.

ENWW

Use the HP Embedded Web Server

249

HP Embedded Web Server features

Information tab

Table 12-1 HP Embedded Web Server Information tab

Menu Description

Device Status

Job Log

Configuration Page

Supplies Status Page

Event Log Page

Usage Page

Device Information

Print

Printable Reports and Pages

Shows the product status and shows the estimated life remaining of HP supplies. The page also shows the type and size of paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click the Change Settings link.

Shows a list of recent product print or copy jobs.

Shows the information found on the configuration page.

Shows the information found on the supplies status page.

Shows a list of all product events and errors. Use the HP Instant Support link (in the Other Links area on all HP Embedded Web Server pages) to connect to a set of dynamic Web pages that help you solve problems. These pages also show additional services available for the product.

Shows a summary of the number of pages the product has printed, grouped by size, type, and paper print path.

Shows the product network name, address, and model information. To customize these entries, click the Device Information menu on the General tab.

Browse to a file on your computer or network, and print it.

Lists the internal reports and pages for the product. Select one or more items to print or view.

General tab

Table 12-2 HP Embedded Web Server General tab

Menu Description

Control Panel Customization

Quick Sets Setup

Alerts

Control Panel Administration

Menu

AutoSend

Control Panel Snapshot

Configure which features appear on the control panel Home screen and the order in which they appear.

Configure jobs that are available in the Quick Sets area of the Home screen on product control panel.

Set up e-mail alerts for various product and supplies events.

Shows the menu structure of the Administration menu on the control panel.

NOTE:

You can configure settings on this screen, but the HP Embedded Web

Server provides more advanced configuration options than are available through the Administration menu.

Configure the product to send automated e-mails regarding product configuration and supplies to specific e-mail addresses.

Shows an image of the current screen on the control-panel display.

250 Chapter 12 Manage and maintain ENWW

Table 12-2 HP Embedded Web Server General tab (continued)

Menu Description

Edit Other Links

Ordering Information

Device Information

Language

Date and Time

Sleep Schedule

Backup and Restore

Restore Factory Settings

Solution Installer

Firmware upgrade

Quota and Statistics Services

Add or customize a link to another Web site. This link appears in the Other Links area on all HP Embedded Web Server pages.

Enter specific supplies ordering information to be displayed on the Supplies Status

Page. For example, this information could include the contact information or Web

URL for the company from which you purchase supplies.

Name the product and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name of the primary contact who will receive information about the product.

Set the language in which to display the HP Embedded Web Server information.

Set the date and time or synchronize with a network time server.

Set or edit a wake time, sleep time, and sleep delay for the product. You can set a different schedule for each day of the week and for holidays.

Create a backup file that contains product and user data. If necessary, you can use this file to restore data to the product.

Restore the product settings to the original factory-set default settings.

Install third-party software programs that can enhance the product functionality.

Download and install product firmware upgrade files.

Connecting to a quota server ensures that each person who uses the product stays within a predetermined range of printed or scanned pages. When connected, the product queries the server at the start of each job to ensure that the person has pages available.

Copy/Print tab

Table 12-3 HP Embedded Web Server Copy/Print tab

Menu Description

Open from USB Setup

Manage Stored Jobs

General Print Settings

Copy Settings

Enable or disable the Open from USB menu on the control panel.

Enable or disable the ability to store jobs in the product memory, and configure jobstorage options.

Configure default settings for print jobs, and arrange the order in which the print options appear on the control-panel display.

Configure default settings for copy jobs, and arrange the order in which the copy options appear on the control-panel display.

ENWW

Use the HP Embedded Web Server

251

Scan/Digital Send tab

Table 12-4 HP Embedded Web Server Scan/Digital Send tab

Menu Description

Address Book

E-mail Setup

Save to Network Folder Setup

Save to USB Setup

OXPd: Workflow

Digital Sending Software Setup

Add e-mail addresses into the product one at a time, and edit e-mail addresses that have already been saved in the product. You can also use the Import/Export tab to load a large list of frequently-used e-mail addresses on to the product all at once, rather than adding them one at a time.

Configure the default e-mail settings for digital sending, including the following:

Settings for the outgoing mail (SMTP) server

Default settings for E-mail Quick Sets jobs

Default message settings, such as the "From" address and the subject line.

Settings for digital signatures and encryption

Settings for e-mail notifications

Settings for individual and group sign-in and permissions

Default scan settings for e-mail jobs

Default file settings for e-mail jobs

Configure the network folder settings for digital sending, including the following:

Default settings for Quick Sets jobs saved in a network folder

Settings for notifications

Default scan settings for jobs saved in a network folder

Default file settings for jobs saved in a network folder

Configure the USB settings for digital sending, including the following:

Default settings for Quick Sets jobs saved on a USB flash drive

Settings for notifications

Default scan settings for jobs saved on a USB flash drive

Default file settings for jobs saved on a USB flash drive

Use third-party workflow tools.

Configure settings related to using optional Digital Sending software.

252 Chapter 12 Manage and maintain ENWW

Fax tab (fskm models only)

Table 12-5 HP Embedded Web Server Fax tab

Menu Description

Fax Send Setup

Speed Dials

Fax Receive Setup

Fax Archive and Forwarding

Fax Activity Log

Configure settings for sending faxes, including the following:

Default settings for outgoing faxes

Default setting for sending faxes with the internal fax modem

Settings for using a LAN fax service

Settings for using an Internet fax service

Manage fax speed dial numbers. You can also import .CSV files containing e-mail addresses, fax numbers, or user records, so that they can be accessed on this product. You can also export e-mail, fax, or user records from the product into a file on your computer. You can then use this file as a data backup, or you can use it to import the records onto another HP product.

Configure default print options for incoming faxes, and set up a fax printing schedule.

Enable or disable fax archiving and fax forwarding, and configure basic settings for each.

Fax archiving is a method to send a copy of all incoming and outgoing faxes to an e-mail address.

Fax forwarding is a method to forward incoming faxes to a different fax device.

Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this product.

Troubleshooting tab

Table 12-6 HP Embedded Web Server Troubleshooting tab

Menu Description

Reports and Tests

Firmware upgrade

Restore Factory Settings

Retrieve Diagnostic Data

Print a variety of reports to help you solve problems with the product.

Change the fax speed and fax speaker mode for diagnostic purposes.

Download and install product firmware upgrade files.

Restore the product settings to the original factory-set default settings.

Export files that contain information about the product for use when you require assistance from HP to solve problems.

ENWW

Use the HP Embedded Web Server

253

Security tab

Table 12-7 HP Embedded Web Server Security tab

Menu Description

General Security

Access Control

Protect Stored Data

Certificate Management

Self Test

Configure an administrator password so you can restrict access to certain features on the product.

Enable or disable the Host USB port on the control panel or the USB connectivity port on the formatter for printing directly from a computer.

Configure access to product functions for specific individuals or groups. Also select the method by which individuals sign in to the product.

Configure and manage the internal hard drive for the product. This product includes an encrypted hard drive for maximum security.

Configure settings for jobs that are stored on the product hard drive.

Install and manage security certificates for access to the product and the network.

Run data and code integrity tests to verify that product security features are operating correctly.

HP Web Services tab

Use the HP Web Services tab to change ePrint or SIPS settings for the product when it is connected to a network.

Networking tab

Use the Networking tab to change network settings for the product when it is connected to an IPbased network. This tab does not appear if the product is connected to other types of networks.

Other Links list

NOTE:

You can configure which items appear in the Other Links list by using the Edit Other

Links menu on the General tab. The following items are the default links.

Table 12-8 HP Embedded Web Server Other Links list

Menu Description

HP Instant Support

Shop for Supplies

Product Support

Show Me How

Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions to product problems.

Connects to the HP SureSupply Web site, where you can receive information on options for purchasing original HP supplies, such as print cartridges and paper.

Connects to the support site for the product, from which you can search for help regarding various topics.

Connects to information that demonstrates specific tasks for the product, such as clearing jams and printing on various types of paper.

254 Chapter 12 Manage and maintain ENWW

Use HP Web Jetadmin software

HP Web Jetadmin is a Web-based software solution for remotely installing, monitoring, and troubleshooting network-connected peripherals. Management is proactive, allowing network administrators the ability to resolve issues before users are affected. Download this free, enhancedmanagement software at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin .

Device plug-ins can be installed into HP Web Jetadmin to provide support for specific product features.

The HP Web Jetadmin software can automatically notify you when new plug-ins are available. On the

Product Update page, follow the directions to automatically connect to the HP Web site and install the latest device plug-ins for your product.

NOTE:

Browsers must be Java™-enabled. Browsing from a Mac OS is not supported.

ENWW

Use HP Web Jetadmin software

255

Product security features

Security statements

The product supports security standards and recommended protocols that help you keep the product secure, protect critical information on your network, and simplify the way you monitor and maintain the product.

For in-depth information about HP's secure imaging and printing solutions, visit www.hp.com/go/ secureprinting . The site provides links to white papers and FAQ documents about security features.

IP Security

IP Security (IPsec) is a set of protocols that control IP-based network traffic to and from the product.

IPsec provides host-to-host authentication, data integrity, and encryption of network communications.

For products that are connected to the network and have an HP Jetdirect print server, you can configure

IPsec by using the Networking tab in the HP Embedded Web Server.

Secure the HP Embedded Web Server

Assign an administrator password for access to the product and the HP Embedded Web Server so that unauthorized users cannot change the product settings.

1.

Open the HP Embedded Web Server by entering the product IP address into the address line of a

Web browser.

2.

Click the Security tab.

3.

Open the General Security menu.

4.

In the Username field, type the name to associate with the password.

5.

Type the password in the New Password box, and type it again in the Verify password box.

NOTE:

If you are changing an existing password, you must first type the existing password in the Old Password field.

6.

Click the Apply button. Make note of the password and store it in a safe place.

Encryption support: HP Encrypted High Performance Hard Disks

Some models include an encrypted hard disk. This hard disk provides hardware-based encryption so you can securely store sensitive print, copy, and scan data without impacting product performance.

This hard disk uses the latest Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and has versatile time-saving features and robust functionality.

Use the Security menu in the HP Embedded Web Server to configure the disk.

256 Chapter 12 Manage and maintain ENWW

For more information about the encrypted hard disk, see the HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disk

Setup Guide.

1.

Go to www.hp.com/support .

2.

Type Secure Hard Disk into the search box and click the >> button.

3.

Click the HP Secure High Performance Hard Disk Drive link.

4.

Click the Manuals link.

Secure stored jobs

You can protect jobs that are stored on the product by assigning a PIN to them. Anyone who tries to print these protected jobs must first enter the PIN at the product control panel.

Lock the control panel menus

You can lock various features on the control panel by using the HP Embedded Web Server.

1.

Open the HP Embedded Web Server by entering the product IP address into the address line of a

Web browser.

2.

Click the Security tab.

3.

Open the Access Control menu.

4.

In the Sign In and Permission Policies area, select which types of users have permission for each of the features.

5.

Click the Apply button.

Lock the formatter

The formatter area, on the back of the product, has a slot that you can use to attach a security cable.

Locking the formatter prevents someone from removing valuable components from it.

ENWW

Product security features

257

Economy settings

Powersave modes

Use the Sleep Schedule feature to reduce power consumption when the product is inactive. You can schedule specific times of the day at which the product enters sleep mode or wakes from sleep mode.

You can customize this schedule for each day of the week or for holidays.

Use the Sleep Delay feature to cause the product to enter sleep mode automatically after a predefined period of inactivity.

NOTE:

These features do not affect product warm-up time.

Set sleep mode

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Administration button.

2.

Open each of the following menus:

a.

Display Settings

b.

Sleep Mode

3.

Select one of the following options:

Use sleep delay : Activates the Sleep Delay feature.

Use sleep schedule : Activates the Sleep Schedule feature.

Balance power savings/Wait time : This setting controls the how long the fuser stays warm between jobs to optimize performance and energy usage.

Set sleep delay

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Administration button.

2.

Open each of the following menus:

a.

General Settings

b.

Energy Settings

c.

Sleep Delay

3.

Select the appropriate time period, and then touch the OK button.

258 Chapter 12 Manage and maintain ENWW

Set the sleep schedule

NOTE:

You must configure the date and time settings before you can use the Sleep Schedule feature.

If you have already configured the date and time settings, you can skip steps 2 and 3 in the following procedure.

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the General Settings menu, and then open the Date/Time Format menu. Configure the following settings:

Date Format

Time Format

3.

Open the Date/Time menu and configure the following settings:

Date

Time

Time Zone

If you are in an area that uses daylight savings time, select the Adjust for Daylight Savings box.

4.

Open the Energy Settings menu, and then open the Sleep Schedule menu.

5.

Touch the Add button, and then select the type of event to schedule: Wake Up or Sleep .

6.

Configure the following settings:

Event Time

Event Days

Event Description

7.

Open the Holidays menu to configure which days are holidays for your area.

ENWW

Economy settings

259

Install external I/O devices

This product is equipped with an external I/O (EIO) slot. You can install an additional HP Jetdirect print server card or external EIO hard drive in the available EIO slot.

NOTE:

This example shows installing an HP Jetdirect print server card.

1.

Turn the product off.

2.

Disconnect all power and interface cables.

NOTE:

This illustration might not show all the cables.

260 Chapter 12 Manage and maintain ENWW

3.

Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the EIO slot, and then remove the cover. You will not need these screws and the cover again. They can be discarded.

4.

Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot.

ENWW

Install external I/O devices

261

5.

Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card.

6.

Reconnect the power cable and remaining interface cables, and turn the product on.

7.

Print a configuration page. An HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information should also print.

If it does not print, turn the product off, and then uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure that it is completely seated in the slot.

8.

Perform one of these steps:

Choose the correct port. See the computer or operating system documentation for instructions.

Reinstall the software, choosing the network installation this time.

Clean the product

To clean the product exterior, use a soft, water-moistened cloth.

262 Chapter 12 Manage and maintain ENWW

Clean the paper path

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Device Maintenance button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Calibration/Cleaning

Cleaning Page

3.

Touch the Print button to print the page.

4.

The cleaning process can take several minutes. When it is finished, discard the printed page.

Clean the scanner glass

NOTE:

If streaks or other defects appear only on copies made by using the document feeder, clean the scanner strip with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.

The scanner strip is located along the left-hand side of the scanner glass. It is not necessary to clean the entire scanner glass.

Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing, which can affect performance. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner glass and white plastic backing.

1.

Use the power switch to turn off the product, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.

ENWW

Clean the product

263

2.

Open the scanner lid.

3.

Clean the scanner glass and the white plastic backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner. Dry the glass and white plastic backing with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.

CAUTION:

Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can damage the product. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the product.

NOTE:

Carefully clean the small glass strip to the left of the scanner glass. Small marks on this glass result in streaks on copies made from the document feeder.

4.

Plug in the product, and then use the power switch to turn on the product.

264 Chapter 12 Manage and maintain ENWW

Product updates

To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the product, go to www.hp.com/go/ ljm4555mfp_firmware .

ENWW

Product updates

265

266 Chapter 12 Manage and maintain ENWW

13 Solve problems

Self help

Solve problems checklist

Restore factory settings

Interpret control-panel messages

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

Improve print quality

The product does not print or it prints slowly

Solve walk-up USB printing problems

Solve connectivity problems

Solve product software problems with Windows

Solve product software problems with Mac

ENWW 267

Self help

In addition to the information in this guide, other sources are available that provide helpful information.

Printable poster for using the product control panel

Quick Reference Topics

Quick Reference Guide

Control panel help

This poster is available on the product CD. It prints on four pages that you can post near the product. It contains information on using the buttons and other features available on the product control panel.

Several Quick Reference Topics for this product are available at this Web site: www.hp.com/support/ljm4555mfp

You can print these topics and keep them near the product. They are a handy reference for procedures that you perform frequently.

This guide contains procedures for the most commonly used product functions. The guide is available from this Web site: www.hp.com/support/ljm4555mfp

You can print this guide and keep it near the product.

The control panel has built-in help that guides you through several tasks, such as replacing the print cartridge and clearing jams.

268 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

Solve problems checklist

Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the product.

1.

Make sure the product Ready light is on. If no lights are on, complete these steps:

a. Check the power-cable connections.

b. Check that the power is turned on.

c.

Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the product power configuration. (See the label that is inside the product for voltage requirements.) If you are using a power strip and its voltage is not within specifications, plug the product directly into the wall. If it is already plugged into the wall, try a different outlet.

d. If none of these measures restores power, contact HP Customer Care.

2.

Check the cabling.

a. Check the cable connection between the product and the computer or network port. Make sure that the connection is secure.

b. Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible.

c.

Check the network connection.

3.

The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.

4.

Ensure that the paper that you are using meets specifications.

5.

Print a configuration page.

a. From the Home screen on the product control panel, open the following menus:

Administration

Reports

Configuration/Status Pages

Configuration Page

b. Touch the Print button.

If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains paper.

If the page jams in the product, follow the instructions on the control panel to clear the jam.

6.

If the configuration page prints, check the following items:

a. If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the product hardware. Contact

HP Customer Care.

b. If the page prints correctly, then the product hardware is working. The problem is with the computer you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program.

7.

Select one of the following options:

ENWW

Solve problems checklist

269

Windows: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes.

Double-click the name of the product.

-or-

Mac OS X: Open the Printer Setup Utility or the Print & Fax list, and double-click the line for the product.

8.

Verify that you have installed the printer driver for this product. Check the program to make sure that you are using the printer driver for this product. The printer driver is on the CD that came with the product. You can also download the printer driver from this Web site: www.hp.com/support/ ljm4555mfp .

9.

Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works, then the problem is with the program you are using. If this solution does not work (the document does not print), complete these steps:

a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed.

b. If you connected the product to the network, connect the product directly to a computer with a USB cable. Redirect the product to the correct port, or reinstall the software, selecting the new connection type that you are using.

Factors that affect product performance

Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:

Maximum product speed, measured in pages per minute (ppm)

The use of special paper (such as transparencies, heavy paper, and custom-size paper)

Product processing and download time

The complexity and size of graphics

The speed of the computer you are using

The USB connection

The product I/O configuration

The network operating system and configuration (if applicable)

The printer driver that you are using

270 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

Restore factory settings

1.

From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration menu.

2.

Open the following menus:

General Settings

Restore Factory Settings

3.

Select one or more categories of settings from the list, and then touch the Reset button.

ENWW

Restore factory settings

271

Interpret control-panel messages

Control-panel message types

Four types of control-panel messages can indicate the status of or problems with the product.

Message type

Status messages

Warning messages

Error messages

Description

Status messages reflect the current state of the product. They inform you of normal product operation and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the product changes. Whenever the product is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the Ready status message appears if the product is online.

Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with the

Ready or status messages and remain until you touch the OK button. Some warning messages are clearable. If the Clearable Warnings menu in the Display Settings menu is set to the Job option , the next print job clears these messages.

Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or clearing a jam.

Some error messages are auto-continuable. If the Continuable Events menu in the Display Settings menu is set to the Auto-Continue option, the product continues normal operation after an autocontinuable error message appears for 10 seconds.

NOTE:

Pressing any button during the 10-second auto-continuable error message overrides the auto-continue feature, and the button function takes precedence. For example, pressing the Stop button pauses printing and offers the option to cancel the print job.

Critical-error messages Critical error messages inform you of a product failure. You can clear some of these messages by turning the product off and then on. These messages are not affected by the Auto-Continue setting. If a critical error persists, service is required.

Control-panel messages

The product provides robust control panel messaging. When a message appears on the control panel, follow the on-screen instructions to resolve the issue. If the product displays an “Error” or “Attention” message, and no steps are shown to resolve the issue, turn the product off then on. Contact HP support if you continue to experience issues with the product.

To get additional information for warnings that appear in the status line, touch the Warning button .

For additional information on a variety of topics, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the home screen.

272 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

The product does not pick up paper

The product picks up multiple sheets of paper

Prevent paper jams

Clear jams

The product does not pick up paper

If the product does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions.

1.

Open the product and remove any jammed sheets of paper.

2.

Load the tray with the correct size of paper for your job.

3.

Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.

4.

Check the product control panel to see if the product is waiting for you to acknowledge a prompt to feed the paper manually. Load paper, and continue.

The product picks up multiple sheets of paper

If the product picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions.

1.

Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not

fan the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.

2.

Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product.

3.

Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.

4.

Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

5.

Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.

Prevent paper jams

To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.

1.

Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product.

2.

Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.

3.

Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

273

4.

Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

5.

Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.

6.

Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the product.

7.

If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed sheets one at a time.

Clear jams

Jam locations

Use this illustration to identify locations of jams. In addition, instructions appear on the control panel to direct you to the location of jammed paper and how to clear it.

NOTE:

Internal areas of the product that might need to be opened to clear jams have green handles or green labels.

WARNING!

To avoid electrical shock, remove any necklaces, bracelets, or other metal items before reaching into the inside of the product.

Figure 13-1

Jam locations

1

2

8

3

4

7

5

6

3

4

5

1

2

Document feeder

Top cover area

Tray 1 area

Right door

Lower right door

NOTE:

For the 1 x 500-sheet feeder, use this door to access Tray 3. For the 3 x 500-sheet feeder, use this door to access Tray 3,4, and 5.

Tray 2, and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5

6

274 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

7

8

Stapler door (for models with a stapler/stacker)

Output bins (for models with a stapler/stacker)

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

275

Clear jams in the document feeder

1.

Open the document feeder cover.

2.

Lift the jam-access door, and remove any jammed paper.

3.

Close the document feeder cover.

276 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

Clear paper jams in the stapler (for models with a stapler/stacker)

1.

Press the release latch, and then slide the stapler/stacker away from the product.

2.

If jammed paper is visible, pull it straight out.

3.

Slide the stapler/stacker toward the product until it latches in place.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

277

Clear staple jams (for models with a stapler/stacker)

1.

Press the release latch, and then slide the stapler/stacker away from the product.

2.

Open the staple-cartridge door.

3.

Lift up on the staple-cartridge green handle, and then pull the cartridge out of the stapler to remove it.

278 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

4.

Lift up on the small lever at the back of the staple cartridge.

5.

Remove the jammed staples.

6.

Close the lever at the back of the staple cartridge. Be sure that it snaps into place.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

279

7.

Insert the staple cartridge into the stapler, push down on the green handle until it snaps into place, and then close the staple-cartridge door.

8.

Slide the stapler/stacker toward the product until it latches in place.

280 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

Clear jams in the output bin area

1.

If paper is visible from the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.

Clear jams from under the top cover

1.

Pull the top cover release lever to open the top cover.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

281

2.

Remove any jammed sheets that are visible in the print cartridge area.

3.

If no jammed paper is visible, remove the print cartridge, and then remove the any jammed paper in the paper path.

4.

Reinstall the print cartridge, and then close the top cover.

282 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

Clear jams in the right door

1.

Open the right door.

2.

Gently pull the paper out of the pickup area.

3.

Close the right door.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

283

Clear jams in Tray 1

1.

Clear the jam by gently pulling the paper straight out. Touch the OK button to clear the message.

2.

If you cannot remove the paper, remove the black-plastic shield.

284 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

3.

Pull the top cover release lever to open the top cover, and then remove the print cartridge.

4.

At the front of the registration roller, lift the small green tab to raise the plastic roller shield, and then pull any jammed paper straight out.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

285

5.

At the back of the roller, use the longer green tab to raise the metal shield, and then pull any jammed paper straight out. Touch the OK button to clear the message.

6.

Lower the shield, reinstall the print cartridge, and then close the top cover.

286 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

7.

Reinstall the black-plastic shield.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

287

Clear jams in Trays 2, 3, 4, or 5

CAUTION:

Opening a tray when paper is jammed can cause the paper to tear and leave pieces of paper in the tray, which might cause another jam. Be sure to clear jams before opening the tray.

1.

Open the tray and make sure that the paper is stacked correctly. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper. To access jammed paper from the tray cavity, remove the tray from the product.

2.

Close the tray.

288 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

Clear jams in the lower right door (Trays 3, 4, or 5)

1.

Open the lower right door.

2.

If paper is visible, gently pull the jammed paper up or down to remove it.

3.

Close the lower right door.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

289

Clear jams in the fuser

CAUTION:

The fuser can be hot. Turn off the product, and then wait for the fuser to cool.

1.

Models with a stapler/stacker: Disconnect the stapler/stacker connector.

2.

Models with a stapler/stacker: Release the stapler/stacker latch, and then slide the stapler/ stacker away from the product to remove it.

3.

All other models: Slide the output bin away from the product to remove it.

290 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

4.

Slide the duplexer away from the product to remove it.

5.

Carefully flex the left-hand side of fuser-entrance guide to release it, and then rotate the guide out and away from the product to remove it.

1

2

6.

Squeeze the two blue tabs on the fuser to release it, slightly lift it up and then pull the fuser straight out of the product to remove it.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

291

7.

Clear the jam by carefully pulling the paper straight out.

8.

Push the fuser straight into the product until it snaps into place.

9.

Insert the right-hand side of fuser-entrance guide into the product, carefully flex the left-hand side of the guide, and then push it back into the product until the pins on the guide snap into the holes on the product chassis.

1

2

292 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

10.

Slide the duplexer into the product to install it.

11.

Models with a stapler/stacker: Slide the stapler/stacker toward the product until it latches into place to install it.

12.

Models with a stapler/stacker: Reconnect the stapler/stacker connector.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

293

13.

All other models: Slide the output bin toward the product to install it.

Clear jams in the registration area

1.

Pull the top cover release lever to open the top cover, and then remove the print cartridge.

294 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

2.

If jammed paper is visible under the registration shield use the green lever to raise the shield, and then clear the jam by gently pulling the paper straight out.

3.

Lower the shield, reinstall the print cartridge, and then close the top cover.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

295

Change jam recovery

This product provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages.

1.

From the Home screen, touch the

Administration button.

2.

Open the General Settings menu, and then open the Jam Recovery menu.

3.

Select one of the following options:

Auto — The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This is the default setting.

Off — The product does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance is optimal.

NOTE:

When using this option, if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on both sides, some pages can be lost.

On — The product always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed. This might cause overall performance to suffer.

296 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

Improve print quality

You can prevent most print-quality problems by following these guidelines.

Use the correct paper type setting in the printer driver.

Use paper that meets HP specifications for this product.

Clean the product as necessary.

Replace the print cartridge when it has reached the end of its estimated life and print quality is no longer acceptable.

Use the printer driver that best meets your printing needs.

Select a paper type

1.

Open the printer driver, click the Properties or Preferences button, and then click the Paper/

Quality tab.

2.

Select a type from the Type is drop-down list.

3.

Click the OK button.

Use paper that meets HP specifications

Use different paper if you are having any of the following problems:

The printing is too light or seems faded in areas.

Specks of toner are on the printed pages.

Toner is smearing on the printed pages.

Printed characters seem misformed.

Printed pages are curled.

Always use a paper type and weight that this product supports. In addition, follow these guidelines when selecting paper:

Use paper that is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, staples, and curled or bent edges.

Use paper that has not been previously printed on.

Use paper that is designed for use in laser printers. Do not use paper that is designed only for use in Inkjet printers.

Use paper that is not too rough. Using smoother paper generally results in better print quality.

ENWW

Improve print quality

297

Print a cleaning page

Print a cleaning page to remove dust and excess toner from the paper path if you are having any of the following problems:

Specks of toner are on the printed pages.

Toner is smearing on the printed pages.

Repeated marks occur on the printed pages.

Use the following procedure to print a cleaning page.

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Device Maintenance button.

2.

Open the following menus:

Calibration/Cleaning

Cleaning Page

3.

Touch the Print button to print the page.

4.

The cleaning process can take several minutes. When it is finished, discard the printed page.

Set the image registration

If you are having problems with text aligning on the page, use the Set Registration menu to set the image registration.

1.

From the Home screen, touch the Administration button.

2.

Open the following menus:

a.

General Settings

b.

Print Quality

c.

Image Registration

d.

Adjust Tray <X>

3.

Touch the Print Test Page setting, and then touch the OK button.

4.

Follow the instructions on the test page to complete the adjustment.

Check the print cartridge

Check the print cartridge, and replace it if necessary, if you are having any of the following problems:

The printing is too light or seems faded in areas.

Printed pages have small unprinted areas.

Printed pages have streaks or bands.

298 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

NOTE:

If you are using a draft or EconoMode print setting, the printing might appear light. HP does not recommend the full time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full time, the toner supply might outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer acceptable, consider replacing the print cartridge

If you determine that you need to replace the print cartridge, print the supplies status page to find the part number for the correct genuine HP print cartridge.

Type of print cartridge

Refilled or remanufactured print cartridge

Genuine HP print cartridge

Steps to resolve the problem

Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP supplies, either new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their quality. If you are using a refilled or remanufactured print cartridge and are not satisfied with the print quality, replace the cartridge with a genuine HP cartridge.

1.

The product control panel or the supplies status page indicates Very Low status when the cartridge has reached the end of its estimated useful life.

Replace the print cartridge if print quality is no longer acceptable.

2.

Visually inspect the print cartridge for damage. See the instructions that follow.

Replace the print cartridge if necessary.

3.

If printed pages have marks that repeat several times at the same distance apart, print a cleaning page. If this does not solve the problem, use the repeating defects information in this document to identify the cause of the problem.

ENWW

Improve print quality

299

Use the printer driver that best meets your printing needs

You might need to use a different printer driver if the printed page has unexpected lines in graphics, missing text, missing graphics, incorrect formatting, or substituted fonts.

HP PCL 6 driver

HP UPD PS driver

HP UPD PCL 5 driver

HP UPD PCL 6 driver

Provided as the default driver on the software installation CD. This driver is automatically installed unless you download a different one from the Web.

Recommended for all Windows environments

Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and product-feature support for most users

Developed to align with the Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for the best speed in Windows environments

Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs that are based on PCL 5

● Recommended for printing with Adobe ® software programs or with other highly graphics-intensive software programs

● Provides support for printing from postscript emulation needs, or for postscript flash font support

Recommended for general office printing in Windows environments

Compatible with previous PCL versions and older HP LaserJet products

The best choice for printing from third-party or custom software programs

The best choice when operating with mixed environments, which require the product to be set to PCL 5 (UNIX, Linux, mainframe)

Designed for use in corporate Windows environments to provide a single driver for use with multiple printer models

Preferred when printing to multiple printer models from a mobile Windows computer

Recommended for printing in all Windows environments

Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and printer feature support for most users

● Developed to align with Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for best speed in Windows environments

Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom solutions based on

PCL 5

Download additional printer drivers from this Web site: www.hp.com/support/ljm4555mfp_software .

300 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

Improve print quality for copies

If you encounter print quality problems in copied documents, review the solutions for printed documents listed previously in this document. However, some print-quality problems occur only in copied documents.

If streaks appear on copies made by using the document feeder, clean the small glass strip on the left side of the scanner assembly.

If dots or other defects appear on copies made by using the scanner glass, clean the scanner glass and the white plastic backing.

ENWW

1.

Use the power switch to turn off the product, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.

2.

Open the scanner lid.

3.

Clean the scanner glass and the white plastic backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.

CAUTION:

Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can damage the product. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the product.

4.

Dry the glass and white plastic backing with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.

5.

Plug in the product, and then use the power switch to turn on the product.

Improve print quality

301

The product does not print or it prints slowly

The product does not print

If the product does not print at all, try the following solutions.

1.

Make sure the product is turned on and that the control panel indicates it is ready.

If the control panel does not indicate the product is ready, turn the product off and then on again.

If the control panel indicates the product is ready, try sending the job again.

2.

If the control panel indicates the product has an error, resolve the error and then try sending the job again.

3.

Make sure the cables are all connected correctly. If the product is connected to a network, check the following items:

Check the light next to the network connection on the product. If the network is active, the light is green.

Make sure that you are using a network cable and not a phone cord to connect to the network.

Make sure the network router, hub, or switch is turned on and that it is working correctly.

4.

Install the HP software from the CD that came with the product. Using generic printer drivers can cause delays clearing jobs from the print queue.

5.

From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click Properties, and open the Ports tab.

If you are using a network cable to connect to the network, make sure the printer name listed on the Ports tab matches the product name on the product configuration page.

If you are using a USB cable and are connecting to a wireless network, make sure the box is checked next to Virtual printer port for USB.

6.

If you are using a personal firewall system on the computer, it might be blocking communication with the product. Try temporarily disabling the firewall to see if it is the source of the problem.

7.

If your computer or the product is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or interference might be delaying print jobs.

302 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

The product prints slowly

If the product prints, but it seems slow, try the following solutions.

1.

Make sure the computer meets the minimum specifications for this product. For a list of specifications, go to this Web site: www.hp.com/support/ljm4555mfp .

2.

When you configure the product to print on some paper types, such as heavy paper, the product prints more slowly so it can correctly fuse the toner to the paper. If the paper type setting is not correct for the type of paper you are using, change the setting to the correct paper type.

3.

If your computer is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or interference might be delaying print jobs.

ENWW

The product does not print or it prints slowly

303

Solve walk-up USB printing problems

The Open from USB menu does not open when you insert the USB accessory

The file does not print from the USB storage accessory

The file that you want to print is not listed in the Open from USB menu

The Open from USB menu does not open when you insert the USB accessory

1.

You might be using a USB storage accessory or a file system that this product does not support.

Save the files on a standard USB storage accessory that uses File Allocation Table (FAT) file systems. The product supports FAT12, FAT16, and FAT32 USB storage accessories.

2.

If another menu is already open, close that menu and then reinsert the USB storage accessory.

3.

The USB storage accessory might have multiple partitions. (Some USB storage accessory manufacturers install software on the accessory that creates partitions, similar to a CD.) Reformat the USB storage accessory to remove the partitions, or use a different USB storage accessory.

4.

The USB storage accessory might require more power than the product can provide.

a. Remove the USB storage accessory.

b. Turn the product off and then on.

c.

Use a USB storage accessory that has its own power supply or that requires less power.

5.

The USB storage accessory might not be functioning correctly.

a. Remove the USB storage accessory.

b. Turn the product off and then on.

c.

Try printing from another USB storage accessory.

The file does not print from the USB storage accessory

1.

Make sure paper is in the tray.

2.

Check the control panel for messages. If paper is jammed in the product, clear the jam.

304 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

The file that you want to print is not listed in the Open from USB menu

1.

You might be trying to print a file type that the USB printing feature does not support. The product supports .pdf, .prn, .pcl, .ps, and .cht file types.

2.

You might have too many files in a single folder on the USB storage accessory. Reduce the number of files in the folder by moving them to subfolders.

3.

You might be using a character set for the file name that the product does not support. In this case, the product replaces the file names with characters from a different character set. Rename the files using ASCII characters.

ENWW

Solve walk-up USB printing problems

305

Solve connectivity problems

Solve direct-connect problems

If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.

Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.

Verify that the cable is not longer than 5 m (16.4 ft). Try using a shorter cable.

Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if necessary.

Solve network problems

Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. Before beginning, print a configuration page from the product control panel and locate the product IP address that is listed on this page.

Poor physical connection

The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product

The computer is unable to communicate with the product

The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network

New software programs might be causing compatibility problems

The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly

The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect

Poor physical connection

1.

Verify that the product is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.

2.

Verify that cable connections are secure.

3.

Look at the network port connection on the back of the product, and verify that the amber activity light and the green link-status light are lit.

4.

If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.

The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product

1.

Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the product is selected. The product IP address is listed on the product configuration page.

2.

If you installed the product using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always

print to this printer, even if its IP address changes.

306 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

3.

If you installed the product using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of the IP address.

4.

If the IP address is correct, delete the product and then add it again.

The computer is unable to communicate with the product

1.

Test network communication by pinging the network.

a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer. For Windows, click Start, click Run, and then type cmd.

b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your product.

c.

If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.

2.

If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same network.

The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network

Hewlett-Packard recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change these settings, you must also change them for your network.

New software programs might be causing compatibility problems

Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct printer driver.

The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly

1.

Check the network drivers, printer drivers, and the network redirection.

2.

Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.

The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect

1.

Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol. Enable it if necessary.

2.

Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.

ENWW

Solve connectivity problems

307

Solve product software problems with Windows

Problem

A printer driver for the product is not visible in the Printer folder

An error message was displayed during the software installation

The product is in Ready mode, but nothing prints

Solution

Reinstall the product software.

NOTE:

Close any applications that are running. To close an application that has an icon in the system tray, right-click the icon, and select Close or Disable.

Try plugging the USB cable into a different USB port on the computer.

Reinstall the product software.

NOTE:

Close any applications that are running. To close an application that has an icon in the task bar, right-click the icon, and select Close or Disable.

Check the amount of free space on the drive where you are installing the product software. If necessary, free up as much space as you can, and reinstall the product software.

If necessary, run the Disk Defragmenter, and reinstall the product software.

Print a Configuration page, and verify the product functionality.

Verify that all of the cables are correctly seated and within specifications. This includes the USB and power cables. Try a new cable.

Verify the IP Address on the Embedded Jetdirect Page matches the IP address for the software port. Use one of the following procedures:

Windows XP, Windows Server

2003, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Vista

1.

Click Start.

2.

Click Settings.

3.

Click Printers and Faxes (using the default Start menu view) or click Printers (using the Classic Start menu view).

4.

Right-click the product driver icon, and then select Properties.

5.

Click the Ports tab, and then click Configure Port.

6.

Verify the IP address, and then click OK or Cancel.

7.

If the IP Addresses are not the same, delete the driver, and reinstall the driver using the correct IP address.

2.

Click Devices and Printers.

3.

Right-click the product driver icon, and then select Printer

properties.

4.

Click the Ports tab, and then click Configure Port.

5.

Verify the IP address, and then click OK or Cancel.

6.

If the IP Addresses are not the same, delete the driver, and reinstall the driver using the correct IP address.

308 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

Solve product software problems with Mac

The printer driver is not listed in the Print & Fax list

The product name does not appear in the product list in the Print & Fax list

The printer driver does not automatically set up the selected product in the Print & Fax list

A print job was not sent to the product that you wanted

When connected with a USB cable, the product does not appear in the Print & Fax list after the driver is selected.

You are using a generic printer driver when using a USB connection

The printer driver is not listed in the Print & Fax list

1.

Make sure that the product .GZ file is in the following hard-drive folder: Library/Printers/PPDs/

Contents/Resources

. If necessary, reinstall the software.

2.

If the GZ file is in the folder, the PPD file might be corrupt. Delete the file and then reinstall the software.

The product name does not appear in the product list in the Print &

Fax list

1.

Make sure that the cables are connected correctly and the product is on.

2.

Print a configuration page to check the product name. Verify that the name on the configuration page matches the product name in the Print & Fax list.

3.

Replace the USB or network cable with a high-quality cable.

The printer driver does not automatically set up the selected product in the Print & Fax list

1.

Make sure that the cables are connected correctly and the product is on.

2.

Make sure that the product .GZ file is in the following hard-drive folder: Library/Printers/PPDs/

Contents/Resources

. If necessary, reinstall the software.

3.

If the GZ file is in the folder, the PPD file might be corrupt. Delete the file and then reinstall the software.

4.

Replace the USB or network cable with a high-quality cable.

ENWW

Solve product software problems with Mac

309

A print job was not sent to the product that you wanted

1.

Open the print queue and restart the print job.

2.

Another product with the same or similar name might have received your print job. Print a configuration page to check the product name. Verify that the name on the configuration page matches the product name in the Print & Fax list.

When connected with a USB cable, the product does not appear in the Print & Fax list after the driver is selected.

Software troubleshooting

Make sure that your Mac operating system is Mac OS X 10.5 or later.

Hardware troubleshooting

1.

Make sure that the product is turned on.

2.

Make sure that the USB cable is connected correctly.

3.

Make sure that you are using the appropriate high-speed USB cable.

4.

Make sure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing power from the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the chain, and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the computer

5.

Check to see if more than two non-powered USB hubs are connected in a row on the chain.

Disconnect all of the devices from the chain, and then connect the cable directly to the USB port on the computer.

NOTE:

The iMac keyboard is a non-powered USB hub.

You are using a generic printer driver when using a USB connection

If you connected the USB cable before you installed the software, you might be using a generic printer driver instead of the driver for this product.

1.

Delete the generic printer driver.

2.

Reinstall the software from the product CD. Do not connect the USB cable until the software installation program prompts you.

3.

If multiple printers are installed, make sure that you have selected the correct printer in the

Format For drop-down menu in the Print dialog box.

310 Chapter 13 Solve problems ENWW

A Supplies and accessories

Order parts, accessories, and supplies

Part numbers

ENWW 311

Order parts, accessories, and supplies

Order supplies and paper

Order genuine HP parts or accessories

Order through service or support providers

Order using HP software www.hp.com/go/suresupply www.hp.com/buy/parts

Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Use the HP Embedded Web Server on page 249

312 Appendix A Supplies and accessories ENWW

Part numbers

Ordering information and availability might change during the life of the product.

Accessories

Item

HP Color LaserJet 1 x 500 Paper Feeder and stand

HP Color LaserJet 3 x 500 Paper Feeder and stand

Stapler/stacker

HP 500-sheet paper feeder

HP envelope feeder

HP stapler cartridge (refill)

HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500

Description

500-sheet paper tray with a storage cabinet and a stand.

1500-sheet paper tray. Contains three

500-sheet trays and a stand.

Stapler/stacker with multiple output bins that hold up to 900 sheets.

500-sheet input tray (no storage cabinet or stand)

75-envelope input tray

Replacement staple cartridge

Fax module

Part number

CE734A

CE735A

CE736A

CE737A

CB524A

C8091A

CC487A

Customer self-repair parts

The following Customer Self-Repair parts are available for your product.

Parts listed as Mandatory self-replacement are to be installed by customers, unless you are willing to pay HP service personnel to perform the repair. For these parts, on-site or return-to-depot support is not provided under your HP product warranty.

Parts listed as Optional self-replacement may be installed by HP service personnel at your request for no additional charge during the product warranty period.

Item

HP LaserJet print cartridge

HP LaserJet fuser kit

HP LaserJet preventative maintenance kit

Description

1

Standard black cartridge

Self-replacement options Part number

Mandatory CE390A

High-capacity black cartridge Mandatory

Mandatory

Selectability number: 90A

CE390X

Selectability number: 90X

Replacement fuser

NOTE:

Included in the preventative maintenance kit.

Includes a fuser, transfer roller, and all pickup and feed rollers

Mandatory 110 volt fuser: CE731A

220 volt fuser: CE732A

ENWW Part numbers 313

Item

Document feeder maintenance kit

Description

1

Includes a replacement roller assembly and separation pad for the document feeder

Replacement control panel

Self-replacement options Part number

Mandatory

Control-panel assembly Mandatory

Formatter assembly

Transfer roller

Tray 2-X pickup/feed/ separation rollers

Document feeder maintenance service kit

Replacement formatter

Replacement transfer roller

Replacement rollers

Mandatory

Mandatory

Mandatory

Replacement document feeder rollers

Mandatory

Document feeder input tray kit Replacement document feeder input tray

Mandatory

Encrypted hard disk drive

(160 GB)

Replacement hard drive Mandatory

Solid state drive (8 MB)

Analog fax card

Replacement solid state drive Mandatory

Replacement fax PCA Mandatory

CE248A

Document feeder fan filter and cover

Fuser entrance guide

Replacement fan filter and cover for document feeder

Mandatory

Duplexer assembly

Output bin assembly

Tray 2 - 5

1x500-sheet paper feeder

1x300-sheet paper feeder

Replacement fuser entrance guide

Replacement duplexer assembly

Replacement output bin assembly

Replacement tray assembly

Mandatory

Mandatory

Mandatory

Mandatory

Replacement feeder assembly Mandatory

Replacement feeder assembly Mandatory

1

Tray 1 pickup and feed rollers

Replacement rollers Optional

For more information, go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies .

CE734A

CE735A

Cables and interfaces

Item

Enhanced I/O (EIO) card

USB cable

Description

HP Jetdirect 635n IPv6/IPsec Print

Server

HP high-speed USB cable 1.8 m (6 ft)

1.8 m (6.0 ft)

Part number

J7961G

Q6264A

314 Appendix A Supplies and accessories ENWW

B Service and support

Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement

HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement

Data stored on the print cartridge

End User License Agreement

OpenSSL

Customer self-repair warranty service

Customer support

ENWW 315

Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement

HP PRODUCT

HP LaserJet M4555, M4555h, M4555f, M4555fskm

DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY

1-year next day on-site warranty

HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.

HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.

HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.

HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use.

Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.

TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO

OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED

AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province.

HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons.

TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE

YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR

ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,

CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED

IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.

THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY

PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE

MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.

316 Appendix B Service and support ENWW

HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement

This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.

This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use.

To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.

TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO

OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED

AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE

FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR

OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.

THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY

PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE

MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.

ENWW HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement 317

Data stored on the print cartridge

The HP print cartridges used with this product contain a memory chip that assists in the operation of the product.

In addition, this memory chip collects a limited set of information about the usage of the product, which might include the following: the date when the print cartridge was first installed, the date when the print cartridge was last used, the number of pages printed using the print cartridge, the page coverage, the printing modes used, any printing errors that might have occurred, and the product model. This information helps HP design future products to meet our customers' printing needs.

The data collected from the print cartridge memory chip does not contain information that can be used to identify a customer or user of the print cartridge or their product.

HP collects a sampling of the memory chips from print cartridges returned to HP's free return and recycling program (HP Planet Partners: www.hp.com/recycle ). The memory chips from this sampling are read and studied in order to improve future HP products. HP partners who assist in recycling this print cartridge might have access to this data, as well.

Any third party possessing the print cartridge might have access to the anonymous information on the memory chip. If you prefer to not allow access to this information, you can render the chip inoperable.

However, after you render the memory chip inoperable, the memory chip cannot be used in an HP product.

318 Appendix B Service and support ENWW

End User License Agreement

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT: This End-User License

Agreement (“EULA”) is a contract between (a) you (either an individual or the entity you represent) and

(b) Hewlett-Packard Company (“HP”) that governs your use of the software product (“Software”). This

EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP or its suppliers for the Software, including a license agreement in online documentation. The term “Software” may include

(i) associated media, (ii) a user guide and other printed materials, and (iii) “online” or electronic documentation (collectively “User Documentation”).

RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO ALL

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA. BY INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING, OR

OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT

ACCEPT THIS EULA, DO NOT INSTALL, DOWNLOAD, OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE. IF

YOU PURCHASED THE SOFTWARE BUT DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, PLEASE RETURN THE

SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN FOURTEEN DAYS FOR A REFUND OF THE

PURCHASE PRICE; IF THE SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON OR MADE AVAILABLE WITH ANOTHER

HP PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT.

1.

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. The Software may include, in addition to HP proprietary software

(“HP Software”), software under licenses from third parties (“Third Party Software” and “Third

Party License”). Any Third Party Software is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the corresponding Third Party License. Generally, the Third Party License is in a file such as

“license.txt” or a “readme” file. You should contact HP support if you cannot find a Third Party

License. If the Third Party Licenses include licenses that provide for the availability of source code

(such as the GNU General Public License) and the corresponding source code is not included with the Software, then check the product support pages of HP's website (hp.com) to learn how to obtain such source code.

2.

LICENSE RIGHTS. You will have the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA:

a. Use. HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the HP Software. “Use” means installing, copying, storing, loading, executing, displaying, or otherwise using the HP Software. You may not modify the HP Software or disable any licensing or control feature of the

HP Software. If this Software is provided by HP for Use with an imaging or printing product

(for example, if the Software is a printer driver, firmware, or add-on), the HP Software may only be used with such product (“HP Product”). Additional restrictions on Use may appear in the User Documentation. You may not separate component parts of the HP Software for Use.

You do not have the right to distribute the HP Software.

b. Copying. Your right to copy means you may make archival or back-up copies of the

HP Software, provided each copy contains all the original HP Software’s proprietary notices and is used only for back-up purposes.

3.

UPGRADES. To Use HP Software provided by HP as an upgrade, update, or supplement

(collectively “Upgrade”), you must first be licensed for the original HP Software identified by HP as eligible for the Upgrade. To the extent the Upgrade supersedes the original HP Software, you may no longer use such HP Software. This EULA applies to each Upgrade unless HP provides other terms with the Upgrade. In case of a conflict between this EULA and such other terms, the other terms will prevail.

ENWW End User License Agreement 319

4.

TRANSFER.

a. Third Party Transfer. The initial end user of the HP Software may make a one-time transfer of the HP Software to another end user. Any transfer will include all component parts, media,

User Documentation, this EULA, and if applicable, the Certificate of Authenticity. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the transferred Software will agree to this EULA. Upon transfer of the HP Software, your license is automatically terminated.

b. Restrictions. You may not rent, lease or lend the HP Software or Use the HP Software for commercial timesharing or bureau use. You may not sublicense, assign or otherwise transfer the HP Software except as expressly provided in this EULA.

5.

PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. All intellectual property rights in the Software and User Documentation are owned by HP or its suppliers and are protected by law, including applicable copyright, trade secret, patent, and trademark laws. You will not remove any product identification, copyright notice, or proprietary restriction from the Software.

6.

LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the HP Software, except and only to the extent that the right to do so is allowed under applicable law.

7.

CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information you provide in relation to (i) your Use of the Software or the HP Product, or (ii) the provision of support services related to the Software or the HP Product. All such information will be subject to HP’s privacy policy. HP will not use such information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to enhance your Use or provide support services.

8.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that you might incur, the entire liability of HP and its suppliers under this EULA and your exclusive remedy under this EULA will be limited to the greater of the amount actually paid by you for the Product or U.S. $5.00. TO THE

MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS

BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,

PERSONAL INJURY, OR LOSS OF PRIVACY) RELATED IN ANY WAY TO THE USE OF OR

INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF HP OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL

PURPOSE. Some states or other jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.

9.

U.S. GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. All

Software is commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to US FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this End User License

Agreement, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory federal laws.

10.

COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS. You will comply with all laws, rules, and regulations (i) applicable to the export or import of the Software, or (ii) restricting the Use of the Software, including any restrictions on nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation.

11.

RESERVATION OF RIGHTS. HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.

© 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

Rev. 04/09

320 Appendix B Service and support ENWW

OpenSSL

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit

(http://www.openssl.org/)

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,

INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON

ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,

EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

ENWW OpenSSL 321

Customer self-repair warranty service

HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period,

HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product.

Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to be used.

322 Appendix B Service and support ENWW

Customer support

Get telephone support for your country/region

Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and problem description ready.

Get 24-hour Internet support

Get support for products used with a Macintosh computer

Download software utilities, drivers, and electronic information

Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements

Register your product

Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/ .

www.hp.com/support/ljm4555mfp www.hp.com/go/macosx www.hp.com/support/ljm4555mfp_software www.hp.com/go/carepack www.register.hp.com

ENWW Customer support 323

324 Appendix B Service and support ENWW

C Product specifications

Physical specifications

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions

Environmental specifications

ENWW 325

Physical specifications

Table C-1 Product dimensions

Product Height

549 mm (21.6 in) M4555 MFP

M4555h MFP

M4555f MFP

M4555fskm MFP

Depth

511 mm (20.1 in)

1010 mm (43.3 in) 719 mm (28.3 in)

1010 mm (43.3 in) 719 mm (28.3 in)

Width

739 mm (29.1 in)

780 mm (30.7 in)

909 mm (35.8 in)

Weight

52.3 kg (115.3 lb)

52.5 kg (115.4 lb)

75.0 kg (166.4 lb)

87.5 kg (192.9 lb)

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions

See www.hp.com/support/ljm4555mfp for current information.

CAUTION:

Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This will damage the product and void the product warranty.

Environmental specifications

Environmental condition

Temperature (product and print cartridge)

Relative humidity

Altitude

Recommended

17° to 27°C (62.6° to 80.6°F)

30% to 70% relative humidity (RH)

N/A

Allowed

10° to 30°C (50° to 86°F)

10% to 80% RH

0 m (0 ft) to 3000 m (9842 ft)

326 Appendix C Product specifications ENWW

D Regulatory information

FCC regulations

Environmental product stewardship program

Declaration of conformity

Declaration of conformity (fax models)

Safety statements

Additional statements for telecom (fax) products

ENWW 327

FCC regulations

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

NOTE:

Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.

328 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

Environmental product stewardship program

Protecting the environment

Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.

Ozone production

This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O

3

).

Power consumption

Power usage drops significantly while in Ready or Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. Hewlett-Packard printing and imaging equipment marked with the ENERGY STAR

®

logo is qualified to the U.S. Environmental

Protection Agency's ENERGY STAR specifications for imaging equipment. The following mark will appear on ENERGY STAR qualified imaging products:

Additional ENERGY STAR qualified imaging product model information is listed at: www.hp.com/go/energystar

Toner consumption

EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge. HP does not recommend the full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, the toner supply might outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge. If print quality begins to degrade and is no longer acceptable, consider replacing the print cartridge.

Paper use

This product’s automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.

Plastics

Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.

ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 329

HP LaserJet print supplies

It’s easy to return and recycle your HP LaserJet print cartridges after use—free of charge—with

HP Planet Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new

HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return multiple cartridges together rather than separately.

HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!

NOTE:

Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to http://www.hp.com/ recycle .

Return and recycling instructions

United States and Puerto Rico

The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more

HP LaserJet print cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below.

Multiple returns (more than one cartridge)

1.

Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag.

2.

Tape the boxes together using strapping or packaging tape. The package can weigh up to 31 kg

(70 lb).

3.

Use a single pre-paid shipping label.

OR

1.

Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from www.hp.com/recycle or

1-800-340-2445 (holds up to 31 kg (70 lb) of HP LaserJet print cartridges).

2.

Use a single pre-paid shipping label.

Single returns

1.

Package the HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original bag and box.

2.

Place the shipping label on the front of the box.

Shipping

For US and Puerto Rico HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns, use the pre-paid, pre-addressed shipping label contained in the box. To use the UPS label, give the package to the UPS driver during your next delivery or pick-up, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. (Requested UPS Ground pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates) For the location of your local UPS drop-off center, call

1-800-PICKUPS or visit www.ups.com

.

330 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

If you are returning the package with the FedEx label, give the package to either the U.S. Postal Service carrier or FedEx driver during your next pick-up or delivery. (Requested FedEx Ground pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates). Or, you can drop off your packaged print cartridge(s) at any U.S. Post

Office or any FedEx shipping center or store. For the location of your nearest U.S. Post Office, please call 1-800-ASK-USPS or visit www.usps.com

. For the location of your nearest FedEx shipping center/ store, please call 1-800-GOFEDEX or visit www.fedex.com

.

For more information, or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit www.hp.com/recycle or call 1-800-340-2445. Information subject to change without notice.

Residents of Alaska and Hawaii

Do not use the UPS label. Call 1-800-340-2445 for information and instructions. The U.S. Postal

Service provides no-cost cartridge return transportation services under an arrangement with HP for

Alaska and Hawaii.

Non-U.S. returns

To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new product supply item) or visit www.hp.com/recycle . Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet printing supplies.

Paper

This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the

HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002.

Material restrictions

This HP product does not contain added mercury.

This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following:

HP LaserJet Enterprise M4555 MFP Series

Type

Weight

Location

User-removable

Carbon monofluoride lithium

0.8 g

On formatter board

No

ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 331

For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle , or contact your local authorities or the

Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org

.

Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the

European Union

This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.

Chemical substances

HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at: www.hp.com/go/reach .

Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner) can be obtained by accessing the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/hpinfo/ community/environment/productinfo/safety .

For more information

To obtain information about these environmental topics:

Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products

HP’s commitment to the environment

HP’s environmental management system

HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program

Material Safety Data Sheets

332 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

Visit www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment .

ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 333

Declaration of conformity

Manufacturer's Name:

Manufacturer's Address:

Declaration of conformity

according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1

Hewlett-Packard Company

11311 Chinden Boulevard

Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA

declares, that the product

Product Name:

HP LaserJet Enterprise M4555 MFP

Regulatory Model Number

2)

HP LaserJet Enterprise M4555h MFP

BOISB-0904-00

Including:

DoC#: BOISB-0904-00-rel.1.0

CE734A – 1x500 sheet input tray with integrated stand

CE735A – 3x500 sheet input tray with integrated stand

Product Options:

CE736A – Stapling mailbox

ALL

Print Cartridges:

CE390A, CE390X

conforms to the following Product Specifications:

SAFETY:

IEC 60950-1:2005 / EN60950-1:2006 +A11

EMC:

IEC 60825-1:2007 / EN 60825-1:2007 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)

IEC 62311:2007 / EN62311:2008

GB4943-2001

CISPR22:2005 +A1/ EN55022:2006 +A1 - Class A 1) ,3)

EN 61000-3-2:2006

EN61000-3-3:2008

EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2

FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A 1) ,3) / ICES-003, Issue 4

GB9254-2008, GB17625.1-2003

Supplementary Information:

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.

334 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

1.

The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.

2.

For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s).

3.

The product meets the requirements of EN55022 & CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies: “Warning – This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.”

Boise, Idaho USA

October 8, 2010

For regulatory topics only:

European Contact:

USA Contact:

Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-

TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034, Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143) www.hp.eu/certificates

Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho

83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)

ENWW Declaration of conformity 335

Declaration of conformity (fax models)

Manufacturer's Name:

Manufacturer's Address:

Declaration of conformity

according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1

Hewlett-Packard Company

11311 Chinden Boulevard

Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA

declares, that the product

Product Name:

HP LaserJet Enterprise M4555f MFP

Regulatory Model Number

2)

HP LaserJet Enterprise M4555fskm MFP

BOISB-0904-01

Including:

DoC#: BOISB-0904-01-rel.1.0

CE734A – 1x500 sheet input tray with integrated stand

CE735A – 3x500 sheet input tray with integrated stand

CE736A – Stapling mailbox

Product Options:

BOISB-0703-00 – Fax Module

ALL

Print Cartridges:

CE390A, CE390X

conforms to the following Product Specifications:

SAFETY:

IEC 60950-1:2005 / EN60950-1: 2006 +A11

EMC:

IEC 60825-1:2007 / EN 60825-1:2007 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)

IEC 62311:2007 / EN62311:2008

GB4943-2001

CISPR22:2005 +A1/ EN55022:2006 +A1 - Class A 1) ,3)

EN 61000-3-2:2006

EN61000-3-3:2008

EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2

FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A 1) ,3) / ICES-003, Issue 4

TELECOM:

GB9254-2008, GB17625.1-2003

ES 203 021; FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 68 4)

Supplementary Information:

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and the

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.

336 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

1.

The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.

2.

For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s).

3.

The product meets the requirements of EN55022 & CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies: “Warning – This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.”

4.

Telecom approvals and standards appropriate for the target countries/regions have been applied to this product, in addition to those listed above.

5.

This product uses an analog fax accessory module which Regulatory Model number is: BOISB-0703-00, as needed to meet technical regulatory requirements for the countries/regions this product will be sold.

Boise, Idaho USA

October 8, 2010

For regulatory topics only:

European Contact:

USA Contact:

Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-

TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034, Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143) www.hp.eu/certificates

Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho

83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)

ENWW Declaration of conformity (fax models) 337

Safety statements

Laser safety

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance

Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.

WARNING!

Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.

Canadian DOC regulations

Complies with Canadian EMC Class A requirements.

« Conforme à la classe A des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». »

VCCI statement (Japan)

Power cord instructions

Make sure your power source is adequate for the product voltage rating. The voltage rating is on the product label. The product uses either 100-127 Vac or 220-240 Vac and 50/60 Hz.

Connect the power cord between the product and a grounded AC outlet.

CAUTION:

To prevent damage to the product, use only the power cord that is provided with the product.

Power cord statement (Japan)

338 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

EMC statement (China)

EMC statement (Korea)

EMI statement (Taiwan)

Laser statement for Finland

Luokan 1 laserlaite

Klass 1 Laser Apparat

HP LaserJet M4555, M4555h, M4555f, M4555fskm, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (2007) mukaisesti.

VAROITUS !

Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.

VARNING !

Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.

HUOLTO

HP LaserJet M4555, M4555h, M4555f, M4555fskm - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö.

Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.

ENWW Safety statements 339

VARO !

Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.

VARNING !

Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.

Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W

Luokan 3B laser.

GS statement (Germany)

Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden.

Substances Table (China)

Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Turkey)

Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur

340 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

Additional statements for telecom (fax) products

EU Statement for Telecom Operation

This product is intended to be connected to the analog Public Switched Telecommunication Networks

(PSTN) of European Economic Area (EEA) countries/regions.

It meets requirements of EU R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries appropriate CE conformity marking.

For more details see Declaration of Conformity issued by the manufacturer in another section of this manual.

However due to differences between individual national PSTNs the product may not guarantee unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point. Network compatibility depends on the correct setting being selected by the customer in preparation of its connection to the PSTN. Please follow the instructions provided in the user manual.

If you experience network compatibility issues, please contact your equipment supplier or Hewlett-

Packard help desk in the country/region of operation.

Connecting to a PSTN termination point may be the subject of additional requirements set out by the local PSTN operator.

New Zealand Telecom Statements

The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of

Telecom’s network services.

This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.

This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom “111” Emergency Service.

This product has not been tested to ensure compatibility with the FaxAbility distinctive ring service for

New Zealand.

Additional FCC statement for telecom products (US)

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.

The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices, which may be connected to the telephone line.

Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all, areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.

This equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C.

ENWW Additional statements for telecom (fax) products 341

An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack, which is Part 68 compliant. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.

If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please see the numbers in this manual for repair and (or) warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.

The customer can do the following repairs: Replace any original equipment that came with the device.

This includes the print cartridge, the supports for trays and bins, the power cord, and the telephone cord. It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.

Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US)

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, or other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided cannot be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges).

Industry Canada CS-03 requirements

Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirement document(s). The

Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible for the equipment to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution can be particularly important in rural areas.

CAUTION:

Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence

Number (REN) of this device is 0.0.

342 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Number of all the devices does not exceed five (5.0). The standard connecting arrangement code (telephone jack type) for equipment with direct connections to the telephone network is CA11A.

Japan Telecom Mark

A08-0138004

Vietnam Telecom wired marking for ICTQC Type approved products

ENWW Additional statements for telecom (fax) products 343

344 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW

Index

Symbols/Numerics

10 x 15 cm paper

printing (Windows) 129

4 x 6 in paper

printing (Windows) 129

A

accessories

ordering 312

part numbers 313

acoustic specifications 326

activity log 243

address books, e-mail

LDAP support 182

recipient lists 186

recipient lists, creating 184

adjust copy images 161

Administration menu, control

panel 20

alerts, e-mail 65

anticounterfeit supplies 107

B

Backup/Restore menu, control

panel 45

batteries included 331

billing code report

printing 244

billing codes 203

Billing Codes Report

description 248

bins, output

capacity 90

locating 6

Blocked Fax List

description 248

blocked fax list report

printing 244

ENWW booklets

creating (Windows) 142

books

copying 165

both sides, copying 169

both sides, printing on

turning on (Mac) 65

browser requirements

HP embedded Web Server

249

browser, Web

remote configuration 194

buttons, control panel

touchscreen 16

C

cable, USB

part number 314

Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control

panel 45

call report 244

Canadian DOC regulations 338

cancel

copy jobs 157

canceling

print job 67

canceling a fax 224

canceling a print request

(Windows) 120

cartridge, print

replacing 108

cartridges

non-HP 107

recycling 107, 330

storage 107

warranty 317

cautions iii

cleaning

paper path 263, 298

product 262

scanner glass 159, 263

clearing log/report data 244

collate

copy jobs 158

Color usage, Macintosh 65

configuration

remote 194

Configuration Page

description 248

configurations, models 2

configuring

IP address 61, 76

connection

USB with Mac 60

USB with Windows 74

connectivity

solving problems 306

control panel

Administration menu 20

Backup/Restore menu 45

Calibrate/Cleaning menu 45

cleaning page, printing 263

Copy Settings menu 24

Display Settings menu 35

Fax Settings menu 29

General Settings menu 21

help 13

Home screen 14

locating 6

Manage Supplies menu 37

Manage Trays menu 37

menus, summary 18

messages, numerical list 115

messages, types of 272

Network Settings menu 39

Open from USB Settings menu

33

Print Options menu 34

Index

345

Print Settings menu 33

Reports menu 20

Scan/Digital Send Settings

menu 27

security 257

Service menu 46

settings 52, 64

Stapler/Stacker Settings menu

38

touchscreen buttons 16

Troubleshooting menu 42

USB Firmware Upgrade menu

46

controlling print jobs 100

conventions, document iii

copies changing number of

(Windows) 122

copy

adjust lightness/darkness 161

books 165

cancel 157

collate 158

creating a stored job 167

enlarge 157

from document feeder 156 from glass 156

improve quality 159

Job Build 171

Job Mode 171

mixed sizes 168

multiple originals 171

optimize for text or pictures

159

photos 166

reduce 157

restoring default settings 164

set options 163 special paper 163

two-sided documents 169

copy settings

HP Embedded Web Server

251

Copy Settings menu, control

panel 24

copying

quality, adjusting 301

counterfeit supplies 107

cover pages

printing (Mac) 68

printing on different paper

(Windows) 138

covers, locating 6

custom print settings (Windows)

123

custom-size paper settings

Macintosh 68

customer support

online 323

D

date/time setting 193

default gateway, setting 80

default settings, copy

restoring 164

defects, repeating 114

deleting

stored jobs 149

dial tone detection, setting 200

dialing mode

setting 197

dialing prefix

setting 200

digital send settings

HP Embedded Web Server

252

digital sending

about 181

address books 184, 186

configure e-mail 182

folders 177

job settings 176

LDAP support 182

product memory 178

recipient lists 186

sending documents 183

SMTP support 182

USB flash drive 180

digital sending utility, remote

configuration 195

Display Settings menu, control

panel 35

disposal, end-of-life 331

document conventions iii

document feeder

capacity 90

copying two-sided documents

169

jams 276

make copies from 156

double-sided copying 169

double-sided printing (duplexing)

loading paper 92

turning on (Mac) 65

drivers changing paper types and

sizes 85

changing settings (Mac) 64

changing settings (Windows)

53

presets (Mac) 67

settings 52

settings (Mac) 67

settings (Windows) 121

supported (Windows) 49

universal 51

DSS. See digital sending utility duplex alignment

setting 152

duplex printing (double-sided)

loading paper 92

settings (Windows) 128

turning on (Mac) 65

duplexer

capacity 91

E

e-mail alerts 65

E-mail feature

enabling 174

EconoMode

set from control panel 22

economy settings 258

electrical specifications 326

embedded Web server 194

Embedded Web Server (EWS)

assigning passwords 256

features 249

end-of-life disposal 331

Enhanced I/O (EIO) card

part number 314 partnumber 314

Enhanced I/O (EIO) devices

installing 260

enlarge

copy jobs 157

envelope feeder

capacity 91

346 Index ENWW

envelopes

loading in Tray 1 94

loading orientation 92

environment, specifications 326

environmental features 4

Environmental Product Stewardship

Program 329

error

codes 238

Error button, control panel

touchscreen 16

error correction mode

settings 203

error messages

control panel 272

e-mail alerts 65

numerical list 115

types of 272

errors

software 308

European Union, waste disposal

332

EWS. See embedded Web server

Explorer, versions supported

HP Embedded Web Server

249

e-mail

about 181

address books 184, 186

configure 182

LDAP support 182

recipient lists 186

sending documents 183

SMTP support 182

F

fax

canceling 224

feeding problems 235

printing 231

receiving 225

required settings 191

sending 220

setup wizard 192, 195

Fax Activity Log

description 248

fax address book 224

Fax Call Report

description 248

fax notification 206

fax number confirmation 201

fax polling 214

Fax Reports

description 248

fax settings

HP Embedded Web Server

253

Fax Settings menu, control panel

29

FCC regulations 328

features 2

features, description 190

feeding problems 235

File Directory Page

description 248

File Upload, Macintosh 65

Finnish laser safety statement 339

firmware

Update Mac 65

firmware upgrades 245

firmware, downloading new 265

first page printing on different paper

(Windows) 138

use different paper 68

fit-to-page 215

folders

sending to 177

fonts

Upload Macintosh 65

formatter

security 257

forms

printing (Windows) 133

fraud Web site 107

fuser

jams 290

G

gateway, setting default 80

gateways

configure 182

general configuration

HP Embedded Web Server

250

General Settings menu, control

panel 21

graphics, low quality 220

group dial. See speed dial

H

hard disks

encrypted 256

help printing options (Windows)

122

Help button, control panel

touchscreen 16

help, control panel 13

Home button, control panel

touchscreen 16

Home screen, control panel 14

HP Customer Care 323

HP Embedded Web Server

copy settings 251

digital send settings 252

fax settings 253

general configuration 250 information pages 250

network settings 254 other links list 254

print settings 251

scan settings 252

security settings 254

troubleshooting tools 253

HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)

features 249

HP fraud Web site 107

HP Jetdirect print server

installing 260

models including 2

HP Universal Print Driver 51

HP Utility 65

HP Utility, Macintosh 65

HP Web Jetadmin 56, 255

HP-UX software 57

humidity requirements 326

I

information pages

HP Embedded Web Server

250

printing or viewing 248

installing

EIO devices 260

print cartridge 108

product on wired networks,

Mac 61

product on wired networks,

Windows 76

ENWW Index 347

software, USB connections 74

software, wired networks 78

interface ports

locating 10, 11

Internet Explorer, versions supported

HP Embedded Web Server

249

IP address

configuring 61, 76

IP Security 256

IPsec 256

IPv4 address 80

IPv6 address 81

J

jams

causes of 273

document feeder 276

fuser 290

lower right door 289

output area 277

output bin 281

recovery 296

registration 294

right door, upper 283

scanner 281

stapler 277, 278

Tray 1 284

trays 288

Japanese VCCI statement 338

JBIG compression

setting 202

Jetadmin, HP Web 56, 255

Jetdirect print server

installing 260

models including 2

Job Build, copying 171

Job Mode, copying 171

job retention

setting options (Windows) 149

job storage

Macintosh settings 69

modes available 147

setting options (Windows) 149

jobs

Macintosh settings 65

jobs, print storing permanent copies

(Windows) 150

storing permanent private

copies (Windows) 151

storing temporarily

(Windows) 150

storing temporary copies

(Windows) 150

jobs, stored

creating (Windows) 147

deleting 149

printing 148

receiving notification when

printed (Windows) 151

setting user names (Windows)

151

specifying names (Windows)

151

K

keys, control panel

touchscreen 16

Korean EMC statement 339

L

labels

printing (Windows) 135

LAN fax 190

landscape orientation

selecting, Windows 131

laser safety statements 338, 339

last page printing on different paper

(Windows) 138

LDAP servers

connect to 182

letterhead

printing (Windows) 133

license, software 319

Linux software 57

loading

Tray 1 94

Tray 2 95, 97

Tray 3, 4, and 5 95, 97

loading paper 90

locked fax printing 231

log/report

activity log 243

activity log, clearing 244 billing code report 244 blocked fax list report 244 fax call report 244 speed dial list report 244

lower right door

jams 289

M

Mac changing paper types and

sizes 67 driver settings 64, 67

HP Utility 65

problems, troubleshooting 309

removing software 63

software 65

supported operating systems

60

Macintosh

resize documents 68

support 323

Macintosh driver settings

custom-size paper 68

Job Storage 69

watermarks 68

maintenance kits

part numbers 313

Manage Supplies menu, control

panel 37

Manage Trays menu, control

panel 37

managing network 79

material restrictions 331

Material Safety Data Sheet

(MSDS) 332

media custom-size, Macintosh

settings 68 first page 68

pages per sheet 69

supported sizes 86

memory

included 2, 65

supply errors 115

memory chip, print cartridge

description 318

memory DIMMs

security 257

memory lock

disabling 231 enabling 231

348 Index ENWW

memory tag

locating 109

memory, saving and deleting

faxes 220

menus

summary 18

menus, control panel

Administration 20

Backup/Restore 45

Calibrate/Cleaning 45

Copy Settings 24

Display Settings 35

Fax Settings 29

General Settings 21

Manage Supplies 37

Manage Trays 37

Network Settings 39

Open from USB Settings 33

Print Options 34

Print Settings 33

Reports 20

Scan/Digital Send Settings 27

Service 46

Stapler/Stacker Settings 38

Troubleshooting 42

USB Firmware Upgrade 46

mercury-free product 331

messages

e-mail alerts 65

numerical list 115

types of 272

mixed sizes

copying 168

models, features 2

modem speed 236

multifunction product 190

multiple pages per sheet

printing (Windows) 130

N

n-up printing

selecting (Windows) 130

names, job

specifying (Windows) 151

Netscape Navigator, versions supported

HP embedded Web Server

249

network

password, changing 79 password, setting 79 settings, changing 79 settings, viewing 79

Network Folder, scan to 177

network settings

HP Embedded Web Server

254

Network Settings menu, control

panel 39

networks

configuring 75

default gateway 80

HP Web Jetadmin 255

installing EIO devices 260

IPv4 address 80

IPv6 address 81

print servers included 2

protocols supported 75

security 76

SMTP servers 182

subnet mask 80

networks, wired

installing product, Mac 61

installing product, Windows

76

non-HP supplies 107

not configured 191

notes iii

notification settings 206

O

on/off button, locating 6

online help, control panel 13

online support 323

Open from USB Settings menu,

control panel 33

opening printer drivers

(Windows) 121

operating environment

specifications 326

operating systems supported 48,

60

optimize copy images 159

ordering

part numbers for 313

supplies and accessories 312

orientation

paper, while loading 92

selecting, Windows 131

other links list

HP Embedded Web Server

254

output area

jams 277

output bin

capacity 90

jams 281

locating 6

output bins

capacity 91

configuring 101

selecting (Windows) 144

P

page sizes scaling documents to fit

(Windows) 140

pages per sheet

selecting (Windows) 130

paper covers, using different paper

138

custom-size, Macintosh

settings 68

first and last pages, using

different paper 138

first page 68

jams 273

load 94

loading orientation 92

pages per sheet 69

printing on preprinted letterhead

or forms (Windows) 133

selecting 297

paper pickup problems

solving 273

paper size

changing 85

paper sizes

selecting 127 selecting custom 127

supported 86

paper tray selection 217

paper types

changing 85

selecting 127

supported 89

paper, ordering 312

ENWW Index 349

paper, special

printing (Windows) 135

part numbers

maintenance kits 313 print cartridges 313 supplies 313

pause, when dialing 220

PBX systems troubleshooting 237

PCL drivers

universal 51

PCL Font List

description 248

phone lines troubleshooting 237

photos

copying 166

photos, low quality 220

polling 214

portrait orientation

selecting, Windows 131

ports

locating 11

PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files

included 65

power

consumption 326

power connection

locating 10

power switch, locating 6

PPDs

included 65

prefix

automatic dialing 200

preprinted paper

printing (Windows) 133

presets (Mac) 67

print cartridge

replacing 108

print cartridges

checking for damage 113

memory chips 318

non-HP 107

part numbers 313

recycling 107, 330

storage 107

warranty 317

print job

canceling 67

print jobs storing permanent copies

(Windows) 150

storing permanent private

copies (Windows) 151

storing temporarily

(Windows) 150

storing temporary copies

(Windows) 150

print media

loading in Tray 1 94

Print Options menu, control panel

34

print quality

improving 297

improving (Windows) 127

print server card

installing 260

print settings

HP Embedded Web Server

251

Print Settings menu, control panel

33

print tasks 119

printer drivers

choosing 300

printer drivers (Mac)

changing settings 64

settings 67

printer drivers (Windows)

changing settings 53

settings 121

supported 49

printing from USB storage accessories

153

settings (Mac) 67

settings (Windows) 121

stored jobs 148

printing locked faxes 231

printing on both sides

settings (Windows) 128

priority, settings 52, 64

private jobs storing permanently

(Windows) 151

storing temporarily

(Windows) 150

problem-solving

e-mail alerts 65

Error button, control panel

touchscreen 16

messages, types of 272

no response 302

slow response 303

product. See multifunction product

product info 1

product memory

sending to 178 product memory, scan to 178

proof and hold

selecting (Windows) 149

protocols, network 75

PS Emulation drivers 49

pulse dialing

setting 197

Q

quick copy jobs

storing (Windows) 150

R

receiving faxes 225

recipient lists 186

recycling

HP printing supplies returns and

environmental program 330

recycling supplies 107

redial interval, setting 198

redial-on-busy

setting 199

redial-on-no-answer

setting 200

reduce

copy jobs 157

registration

jams 294

regulatory statements environmental product

stewardship program 329

remote configuration

digital sending utility 195

Web browser 194

Web Jetadmin 194

removing Mac software 63

repeating defects,

troubleshooting 114

Reports menu, control panel 20

required settings

country/region 191

350 Index ENWW

resize documents

Macintosh 68

Windows 140

resolution

setting 205

restore factory settings 271

restoring default settings

copy 164

retention, job

modes available 147

setting options (Windows) 149

right door, upper

jams 283

rings-to-answer 210

ruler, repetitive defect 114

S

safety statements 338, 339

SAP software 57

save to device memory

enabling 174

save to network folder

enabling 174

Save to product memory 178

Save to USB 180

save to USB

enabling 174

scale documents

Macintosh 68

Windows 140

scan

job settings 176

scan settings

HP Embedded Web Server

252

Scan/Digital Send Settings menu,

control panel 27

scanner

glass cleaning 301

jams 281

scanner glass

cleaning 159

scanning to e-mail

about 181

address books 184, 186

configure 182

job settings 176

LDAP support 182

recipient lists 186

sending documents 183

SMTP support 182

scanning to folder 177

scanning to product memory 178

scanning to USB 180

security

encrypted hard disk 256

security features 76

security settings

HP Embedded Web Server

254

security slot

locating 11

Send to E-mail

enabling 174

Send to Folder 177

sending a fax

delete multiple recipients 227

to multiple recipients 226

using fax address book

numbers 224

sending to e-mail

about 181, 182

address books 184, 186

job settings 176

LDAP support 182

recipient lists 186

sending documents 183

SMTP support 182

Service menu, control panel 46

service settings 245

settings

billing codes 203

dial tone detection 200

dialing mode 197

dialing prefix 200

driver presets (Mac) 67

drivers 53

drivers (Mac) 64

error correction mode 203

fax number confirmation 201

fit-to-page 215

JBIG compression 202

memory lock 231

paper tray selection 217

priority 52, 64

redial interval 198

redial-on-busy 199

redial-on-no-answer 200

required 191

resolution 205

restore factory 271

rings-to-answer 210

stamp received faxes 215

shortcuts (Windows)

creating 124

using 123

Sign in

control panel 176

sleep delay

disabling 258 enabling 258

Sleep Schedule

setting 259

slow fax reception 236

slow fax transmission 237

small size paper

printing (Windows) 129

SMTP servers

connect to 182

software

embedded Web server 56

HP Utility 65

HP Web Jetadmin 56

installing, USB connections 74

installing, wired networks 78

Mac 65

problems 308

settings 52, 64

software license agreement

319

supported operating systems

48, 60

uninstalling for Windows 55

uninstalling Mac 63

Solaris software 57

solving

direct-connect problems 306 network problems 306

walk-up USB printing

problems 304

special media

guidelines 84

special paper

copying 163

guidelines 84

printing (Windows) 135

specifications

electrical and acoustic 326 operating environment 326

ENWW Index 351

speed dial

creating 226

delete 227

list report 244

Speed Dial List

description 248

stamp received faxes 215

staple options

selecting (Windows) 145

stapler

jams 277, 278

stapler/stacker

capacity 91

Stapler/Stacker Settings menu,

control panel 38

staples

replacing 111

Start button, control panel

touchscreen 16

status

Home screen, control panel 14

HP Utility, Macintosh 65

messages, types of 272

status message bar 220

status, fax accessory page 234

stopping a print request

(Windows) 120

storage, job

Macintosh settings 65, 69

modes available 147

setting options (Windows) 149

stored jobs

creating (Windows) 147

creating from a copy 167

deleting 149

printing 148

receiving notification when

printed (Windows) 151

security 257

setting user names (Windows)

151

specifying names (Windows)

151

storing

print cartridges 107

storing jobs permanent copies (Windows)

150

permanent private copies

(Windows) 151

proof and hold (Windows)

149 setting options (Windows) 149

temporary copies (Windows)

150

temporary private jobs

(Windows) 150

with Windows 147

subnet mask 80

supplies

counterfeit 107

memory errors 115

non-HP 107

ordering 312

part numbers 313

recycling 107, 330

replacing 108

status, viewing with HP Utility

65

supplies status page

description 248

printing 115

support

online 323

supported paper 86

system requirements

HP Embedded Web Server

249

T

T.30 Trace report 245

Taiwan EMI statement 339

TCP/IP manually configuring IPv4

parameters 80

manually configuring IPv6

parameters 81

technical support

online 323

temperature requirements 326

tips iii

tone dialing

setting 197

toner cartridges. See print cartridges transparencies

printing (Windows) 135

Tray 1

capacity 90

jams 284

Tray 2

capacity 90

Tray 3, 4, and 5

capacity 90

trays

capacity 90

configure 99

included 2

jams 288

load 90

locating 6

Macintosh settings 65

paper orientation 92

selecting (Windows) 127

troubleshooting

control panel messages 272

direct-connect problems 306

error messages, numerical list

115

jams 273

Mac problems 309

network problems 306

paper feed problems 273

PBX systems 237

repeating defects 114

slow fax reception 236

slow fax transmission 237

walk-up USB printing

problems 304

Troubleshooting menu, control

panel 42

troubleshooting tools

HP Embedded Web Server

253

two-sided copying 169

two-sided printing

settings (Windows) 128

turning on (Mac) 65

U

uninstalling Mac software 63

uninstalling Windows software 55

universal print driver 51

UNIX software 57

updates, downloading product

265

Usage Page

USB

description 248

sending to 180

352 Index ENWW

USB configuration, Mac 60

USB configuration, Windows 74

USB Firmware Upgrade menu,

control panel 46

USB storage accessories

printing from 153

USB, scan to 180

user names setting for stored jobs

(Windows) 151

V

voice calls and retries 231

VoIP 232

W

walk-up USB printing 153

Warning button, control panel

touchscreen 16

warnings iii

warranty

customer self repair 322

license 319

print cartridges 317

product 316

watermarks

adding (Windows) 142

Web browser requirements

HP Embedded Web Server

249

Web Jetadmin, remote

configuration 194

Web sites

customer support 323

fraud reports 107

HP Web Jetadmin,

downloading 255

Macintosh customer support

323

Material Safety Data Sheet

(MSDS) 332

universal print driver 51

Windows

driver settings 53

drivers supported 49

supported operating systems

48

universal print driver 51

wizard, fax setup 192, 195

ENWW Index 353

354 Index ENWW

*CE502-90906*

*CE502-90906*

CE502-90906

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents